Pioneer VSX-1021-K User Manual

Download

Page 1

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER RECEPTOR AUDIO-VIDEO MULTICANAL

VSX-1021

-K

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US) http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)

Protect your new investment

The details of your purchase will be on file for reference in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft.

Receive free tips, updates and service bulletins on

your new product

Improve product development

Your input helps us continue to design products that meet your needs.

Receive a free Pioneer newsletter

Registered customers can opt in to receive a monthly newsletter.

Operating Instructions

Manual de instrucciones

Page 2

Page 3

IMPORTANT NOTICE

THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTOM. RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SAFE PLACE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

CAUTION

This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections.

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

CAUTION: HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH.

The top surface over the internal heatsink may become hot when operating this product continuously.

D36-AP9-1_A1_En

D8-10-3a_A1_En

K041_A1_En

D8-10-1-3_A1_En

The Safety of Your Ears is in Your Hands

Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level – a level that lets the sound come through clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing “comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound, so what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts.

ESTABLISH A SAFE LEVEL:

• Set your volume control at a low setting.

• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it

comfortably and clearly, without distortion.

• Once you have established a comfortable sound level, set the dial and leave it there.

BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES:

• Do not turn up the volume so high that you can’t hear what’s around you.

• Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations.

• Do not use headphones while operating a motorized vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic hazard and is illegal in many areas.

S001a_A1_En

Page 4

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

Contents

01 Before you start

Checking what’s in the box ............................6

Installing the receiver ..................................... 6

Loading the batteries ...................................... 6

Operating range of remote control unit........ 6

Canceling the demo display .......................... 6

About operation of the receiver with a

mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.) ............. 6

About using AVNavigator (included

CD-ROM) ......................................................... 6

02 Controls and displays

Remote control ............................................... 8

Display ............................................................. 9

Front panel .................................................... 10

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment ........................ 11

Rear panel .....................................................11

Determining the speakers’ application ......11

Placing the speakers ....................................12

Connecting the speakers .............................13

Installing your speaker system .................... 13

Selecting the Speaker system ..................... 14

About the audio connection ........................ 15

About the video converter ............................ 15

About HDMI .................................................. 15

Connecting your TV and playback

components .................................................. 16

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD

recorder and other video sources ............... 18

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or

other set-top box ...........................................18

Connecting other audio components .........19

Connecting AM/FM antennas .....................19

MULTI-ZONE setup .......................................20

Connecting a SiriusConnect Tuner ............. 20

Connecting to the network through

LAN interface ................................................ 20

Connecting optional Bluetooth

ADAPTER ...................................................... 21

Connecting an iPod ...................................... 21

Connecting a USB device ............................21

Connecting to the front panel video

terminal ......................................................... 21

Connecting to a wireless LAN ..................... 22

Connecting an IR receiver ...........................22

Operating other Pioneer components

with this unit’s sensor ..................................22

Plugging in the receiver ............................... 23

04 Basic Setup

Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language) ........................................... 24

Automatically conducting optimum

sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) ............... 24

The Input Setup menu ..................................25

Operation Mode Setup .................................26

05 Basic playback

Playing a source ........................................... 28

Playing an iPod ............................................. 28

Playing a USB device ................................... 29

Listening to the radio .................................... 31

Listening to Satellite Radio ..........................31

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless

Enjoyment of Music ......................................33

06 Listening to your system

Auto playback ............................................... 35

Listening in surround sound .......................35

Using Stream Direct .....................................36

Selecting MCACC presets ........................... 36

Choosing the input signal ............................36

Better sound using Phase Control .............. 37

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery ............... 38

Features of Home Media Gallery .................38

Introduction ...................................................38

Playback with Home Media Gallery ............38

Advanced operations for Internet radio ...... 40

About network playback............................... 40

About playable file formats ..........................41

08 Control with HDMI function

About the Control with HDMI function .......43

Making Control with HDMI connections .... 43

HDMI Setup................................................... 43

Before using synchronization ...................... 44

About synchronized operations .................. 44

Setting the PQLS function .......................... 44

Cautions on the Control with HDMI

function .........................................................45

09 Using other functions

Setting the Audio options ............................ 46

Setting the Video options ............................. 48

Switching the speaker terminals ................ 49

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls .................49

Making an audio or a video recording ........50

Reducing the level of an analog signal .......50

Using the sleep timer ...................................50

Dimming the display .................................... 50

Checking your system settings ...................50

Resetting the system .................................... 50

10 Controlling the rest of your system

About the Remote Setup menu...................52

Operating multiple receivers ....................... 52

Setting the remote to control other

components .................................................. 52

Selecting preset codes directly ...................52

Programming signals from other

remote controls .............................................53

Erasing one of the remote control

button settings .............................................. 53

Erasing all learnt settings that are in

one input function ........................................ 53

Direct function ..............................................54

Multi Operation and System Off ..................54

Resetting the remote control settings ........ 55

Controlling components ..............................56

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the

Advanced MCACC menu ............................. 58

Automatic MCACC (Expert) .........................58

Manual MCACC setup ................................. 60

Checking MCACC Data ................................ 62

Data Management........................................63

12 The System Setup and Other

Setup menus

Making receiver settings from the

System Setup menu ..................................... 64

Manual speaker setup ..................................64

Network Setup menu ................................... 66

Checking the Network Information .............67

The Other Setup menu ................................. 68

13 Additional information

Troubleshooting 1 .........................................70

Troubleshooting 2 .........................................76

About status messages ............................... 80

Important information regarding the

HDMI connection .........................................80

Cleaning the unit .......................................... 80

Surround sound formats ............................. 81

About iPod .....................................................81

About SIRIUS ................................................81

About FLAC ................................................... 81

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct

with different input signal formats ..............82

Glossary .........................................................83

Features index ...............................................85

Specifications ...............................................86

Preset code list..............................................86

Page 5

Flow of settings on the receiver

Flow for connecting and setting the receiver

The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.

Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12

Important

The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as in steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 6 .

1 Before you start

! Checking what’s in the box on page 6 ! Loading the batteries on page 6

2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 11)

! 7.1 channel surround system (Front height) ! 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide) ! 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ! 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) ! 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

3 Connecting the speakers

! Placing the speakers on page 12 ! Connecting the speakers on page 13 ! Installing your speaker system on page 13 ! Bi-amping your speakers on page 14

4 Connecting the components

! About the audio connection on page 15 ! About the video converter on page 15 ! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 16 ! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 19 ! Plugging in the receiver on page 23

5 Power On

6 Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 24)

7 MCACC speaker settings

! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24

8 The Input Setup menu (page 25)

(When using connections other than the recommended connections)

9 Basic playback (page 28)

10 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired

! Using the various listening modes (page 35) ! Better sound using Phase Control (page 37) ! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 58) ! Changing the channel level while listening (page 65) ! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page

46)

! Setting the PQLS function (page 44) ! Setting the Audio options (page 46) ! Setting the Video options (page 48)

11 Other optional adjustments and settings

! Control with HDMI function (page 43) ! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 58) ! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 64)

12 Making maximum use of the remote control

! Operating multiple receivers (page 52) ! Setting the remote to control other components (page 52)

Page 6

01 Before you start

Before you start

Checking what’s in the box

Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:

! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.)) ! Remote control unit ! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm

system operation) x2

! AM loop antenna ! FM wire antenna ! iPod cable ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) ! These operating instructions

Installing the receiver

! When installing this unit, make sure to put it

on a level and stable surface.

! Don’t install it on the following places:

— on a color TV (the screen may distort) — near a cassette deck (or close to a device that

gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.

— in direct sunlight — in damp or wet areas — in extremely hot or cold areas — in places where there is vibration or other

movement

— in places that are very dusty — in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as

a kitchen)

! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel

while the power is on or just after it is turned off. The bottom panel becomes hot when the power is on (or right after it is turned off) and could cause burns.

Loading the batteries

The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations; they may not last over a long period. We recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.

WARNING

! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight

or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

CAUTION

Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:

! Never use new and old batteries together. ! Insert the plus and minus sides of the

batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.

! Batteries with the same shape may have

different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.

! When disposing of used batteries, please

comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

(Symbol examples for batteries)

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.

K058c_A1_En

Operating range of remote control unit

The remote control may not work properly if: ! There are obstacles between the remote

control and the receiver’s remote sensor.

! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining

onto the remote sensor.

! The receiver is located near a device that is

emitting infrared rays.

! The receiver is operated simultaneously with

another infrared remote control unit.

30°

7 m (23 ft.)

Canceling the demo display

On this receiver, the demo mode is turned on by default. When the power is turned on, the demo display is set and various indications are shown on the front panel display. To cancel the demo display, connect the power cord, then perform the operation below.

! The demo mode is canceled automatically

when the Full Auto MCACC operation is performed.

1 Switch the receiver into standby. 2 While holding down ENTER on the

front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Select ‘FL DEMO’ using TUNE i/j. 4 Use PRESET k/l to select FL DEMO

c OFF d then press ENTER on the front panel.

About operation of the receiver with a mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.)

The receiver can be controlled from the mobile terminal by installing a special application on the mobile terminal. For details, see the product information on the Pioneer website. This special application may be changed or discontinued without notice.

About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM)

The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the receiver’s connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be completed easily simply by following the instructions on the screen to make the connections and settings. There are also other features enabling easy use of various functions, including an Interactive Manual that operates in association with the receiver, updating of various types of software, and MCACC Application that lets you check the MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs.

Page 7

Before you start

Installing AVNavigator

1 Load the included AVNavigator CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive.

! The installation screen is displayed. Proceed

to step 2.

! If the installation screen does not appear,

click [AVNavigator] on the desktop.

2 Follow the instructions on the screen to install.

When “Finish” is selected, installation is completed.

3 Remove the included AVNavigator CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive.

Handling the CD-ROM

Operating Environment

! This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft®

Windows® XP/Vista/7.

! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator

functions. The supported browser is Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later. With other browsers, some functions may be limited or the display may not appear properly.

Precautions For Use

! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal

computer. It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player. Attempting to play this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music CD player can damage speakers or cause impaired hearing due to the large volume.

License

! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated

below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its use.

! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM

belongs to Pioneer Corporation. Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, public

transmission, translation, sales, lending or other such matters that go beyond the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions. Permission to use this CD-ROM is granted under license by Pioneer Corporation.

General Disclaimer

! Pioneer Corporation does not guarantee

the operation of this CD-ROM with respect to personal computers using any of the applicable OS. In addition, Pioneer Corporation is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM and is not responsible for any compensation. The names of private corporations, products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms.

Using AVNavigator

1 Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to launch AVNavigator.

AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi starts up. The language selection screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to make the connections and automatic settings. Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the first time AVNavigator is launched.

2 Select and use the desired function.

AVNavigator includes the following functions:

! Wiring Navi – Guides you through

connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be made easily.

! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays

the pages explaining the functions that have been operated on the receiver. It is also possible to operate the receiver from the Interactive Manual.

! Glossary – Displays glossary pages.

! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced

MCACC measurement results vividly on the computer.

There are special operating instructions

for MCACC Application. These instructions are included in the AVNavigator Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them when using MCACC Application.

! Software Update – Allows various types of

software to be updated.

! Settings – Used to make various

AVNavigator settings.

! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.

Note

To use the AVNavigator of another model, first uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator, then install the AVNavigator of the other model.

Deleting the AVNavigator

You can use the following method to uninstall (delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.

% Delete from the Control Panel of the PC.

From the Start menu, click “Program” d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d “AVNavigator(VSX-1021)” d “Uninstall”.

Page 8

02 Controls and displays

Controls and displays

Remote control

This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

2,3

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR

SAT

HMG

CDTV

USB

iPod

SELECT

INPUT

TV CONTROL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

TV CTRL

TUNER

SIRIUS

RECEIVER

ZONE 2

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

VOL

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TUNE

ENTER

RETURN

TUNE

MEMORY MENU

PGM

CTRL STATUS

PHASE

AUDIO

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

DIMMER

807 9

CLASS

ENTER

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

LISTENING MODE

RECEIVER

HDMI

ADPT

VIDEO

T.EDIT

INFO

DISP

12 13

PRESET

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

! White – Receiver control, TV control ! Blue – Other controls (See pages 28, 29, 31, 33

and 56.)

1 u RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations (page 54).

3 RCU SETUP

Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode (page 52).

4 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components (page 52). Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input function (page 28).

5 ZONE 2

Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 (page

49).

6 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button.

7 Receiver setting buttons

Press first to access:

! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Audio options (page 46).

! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Video options (page 48).

! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home

Menu (pages 24, 25, 43, 58 and 64).

! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the

current menu screen.

8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 58) and the Audio or Video options (page 46 or 48).

9 Receiver Control buttons

Press first to access:

! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase

Control (page 37).

! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver

settings (page 50).

! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting

(page 44).

! S.RETRIEVER – Press to restore CD quality

sound to compressed audio sources (page

46).

! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal

(page 36).

! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC

presets (page 36).

! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep

mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 50).

! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a

channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (page 65).

! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an

analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 50).

! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display

(page 50).

10 LISTENING MODE controls

! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between

Auto Surround (page 35), Auto Level Control mode and Stream Direct mode (page 36).

! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback

mode (page 35).

! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding

and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, etc.) (page 35).

! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the

various surround modes (page 35).

11 Remote control LED

Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.

12 TV CTRL

Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer when controlling the TV (page 52).

Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands). Switch to perform operations in the main zone. Also use this button to set up surround sound.

14 MASTER VOLUME +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

15 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

Page 9

Controls and displays

Display

21 3 9754 108 11 12 13

AUTO

HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG

AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT

PROLOGIC x

ADV.SURROUND

STANDARD

SP AB

L C R SL SR XL XR

LFE

Neo:6

SLEEP

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD

DTS HD ES 96/24

MSTR

CD-R

1 Signal indicators

Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (page 36).

2 Program format indicators

Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input.

! L/R – Left front/Right front channel ! C – Center channel ! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround

channel

! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( ))

indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)

! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones

above

! XC – Either one channel other than the ones

above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag

3 Digital format indicators

Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.

! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital

decoding.

! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital

Plus decoding.

! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD

decoding.

! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding. ! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.

DSD PCM MULTI-ZONE S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX

TUNER

SIRIUS

iPod

PQLS

DVD

18 1915 16 17

ALC

DVR

ATT

OVER

VIDEO HMG

HDMI

TUNED STEREO MONO

[ 2 ]

USB

[ 3 ]

[ 4 ]

! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. ! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream

Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.

! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM

signals.

! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD

Master Audio signals.

4 MULTI-ZONE

Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 49).

5 SOUND

Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features is selected (page 46).

6 S.RTRV

Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active (page 46).

7 Listening mode indicators

! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto

Surround feature is switched on (page 35).

! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level

control) mode is selected (page 35).

! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure

Direct is selected (page 36).

! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of

the Advanced Surround modes has been selected (page 35).

! STANDARD – Lights when one of the

Standard Surround modes is switched on (page 35).

8 (PHASE CONTROL)

Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 37).

9 Analog signal indicators

Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal (page 50).

10 Tuner indicators

! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being

received.

! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM

broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set

using MPX.

Lights when the sound is muted.

12 Master volume level

Shows the overall volume level. “---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates the maximum level.

13 Input function indicators

Light to indicate the input function you have selected.

14 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

15 Speaker indicators

Lights to indicate the current speaker system using SPEAKERS (page 49).

16 SLEEP

Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page

50).

17 Matrix decoding format indicators

! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2

Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page

35).

! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the

receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 35).

18 Character display

Displays various system information.

19 Remote control mode indicator

Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (page 68)

Page 10

02 Controls and displays

Front panel

1 2 53 34 6 7 8

AUDIO/ VIDEO MULTI-CH ANNEL RECEIVER

ADVANCED

MCACC

FL OFF

SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

PHONES

109 11 12 13 161514

1 u STANDBY/ON

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 INPUT SELECTOR dial

Use to select an input function.

3 Indicators

! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is

set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 46).

! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing

displayed) is selected with the display’s dimmer adjustment (page 50).

! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-

equipped component; lights when the component is connected (page 16).

! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/

iPhone/iPad is connected (page 21).

4 MULTI-ZONE controls

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page

20) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone (page 49).

5 Character display

See Display on page 9 .

AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

STANDARD SURROUND

SURROUND

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

RETRIEVER AIR

iPhone

DIRECT

CONTROL

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPad

iPod iPhone iPad

SOUND

ADVANCED

6 TUNER controls

! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio

bands (page 31).

! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET

k/l and ENTER to memorize and name

stations for recall (page 31).

! TUNE i/j – Find radio frequencies (page

31).

! PRESET k/l – Find preset stations (page

31).

7 Remote sensor

Receives the signals from the remote control (page 6).

8 MASTER VOLUME dial 9 SPEAKERS

Use to change the speaker terminal (page 49).

10 PHONES jack

Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

11 Listening mode buttons

! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –

Switches between Auto Surround (page 35), Auto Level Control and Stream Direct mode

VSX

-1021

(page 36).

! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for

Standard decoding and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo etc.) (page 35).

! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch

MASTER VOLUME

between the various surround modes (page

35).

12 MCACC SETUP MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone (page

24).

13 AUDIO/VIDEO input

See Connecting to the front panel video terminal on page 21 .

14 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals

Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as an audio and video source (page 21), or connect a USB device for audio and photo playback (page 21).

15 SOUND RETRIEVER AIR

When the button is pressed, the input switches to ADAPTER PORT and the listening mode is automatically set to SOUND RETRIEVER AIR (page 34).

16 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 29).

Page 11

Connecting your equipment

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

CAUTION

Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

Rear panel

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO 1

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

ZONE 2

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

SIRIUS

SUBWOOFER

DVDY PBP

PRE OUT

Note

The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The Input Setup menu on page 25 to change the assignments if other connections are used.

Input function

DVD COAX-1

TV/SAT OPT-1

DVR/BDR OPT-2

VIDEO 1

HDMI 1 IN 1

CD COAX-2

LAN

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R LR

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

16 .

IN1IN

)

DVD

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

(

)

DVR/BDR

TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

OPTICAL

Class 2 Wiring

ASSIGNABLE

)(

(

)

Single

SELECTABLE SELECTABLE

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI

Input Terminals

Digital HDMI Component

(DVD)

(BD)

(DVR/BDR)

(VIDEO 1)

IN 1

IN 2

Determining the speakers’ application

This unit permits you to build various surround systems, in accordance with the number of speakers you have. ! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left

and right channels (L and R).

! It is also possible to only connect one of the

surround back speakers (SB) or neither.

Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below.

Important

! The Speaker System setting must be made if

you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on page 64 ).

! Sound does not come through simultaneously

from the front height, front wide, speaker B and surround back speakers. Output speakers are different depending on the input signal or listening mode.

[A] 7.1 channel surround system (Front height)

*Default setting

! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH)

FHR

FHL

A 7.1 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker

SBR

SBL

(C), the left and right front height speakers (FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofer (SW). It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height or front wide speakers and the surround back speakers. This surround system produces a more true-tolife sound from above.

[B] 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide)

! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW)

FWR

FWL

SBL

SBR

This plan replaces the left and right front height speakers shown in [A] with the left and right front wide speakers (FWL/FWR). It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height or front wide speakers and the surround back speakers. This surround system produces a true-to-life sound over a wider area.

[C] 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

! Speaker System setting: Speaker B

Page 12

03 Connecting your equipment

SBL

SBR

Speaker B

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 7.1-channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers.

[D] 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

[E] 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

ZONE 2

Main zone

Sub zone

Other speaker connections

! Your favorite speaker connections can be

selected even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers (except front left/right speakers).

! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect

speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could be damaged.)

! After connecting, be sure to conduct the

Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 .

Placing the speakers

Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.

FHL

FWL

30 30

120 120

SBL

! Place the surround speakers at 120º from

the center. If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front height speakers / front wide speakers, we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you.

! If you intend to connect only one surround

back speaker, place it directly behind you.

! Place the left and right front height speakers

at least one meter (3.3 ft.) directly above the left and right front speakers.

Some tips for improving sound quality

Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system. ! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.

Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the

FHR

FWR

SBR

subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.

! For the best stereo effect, place the front

speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from the TV.

! If you’re going to place speakers around your

CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.

! If you’re using a center speaker, place the

front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.

! Place the center speaker above or below the

TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.

! It is best to angle the speakers towards the

listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.

! Surround and surround back speakers

should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.

! Try not to place the surround speakers farther

away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.

Page 13

Connecting your equipment

Connecting the speakers

Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.

CAUTION

! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS

LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric

shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.

! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is

twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.

Bare wire connections

CAUTION

Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.

1 Twist exposed wire strands together. 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed

wire. 3 Tighten terminal.

1 2 3

10 mm (3/8 in.)

Note

! Please refer to the manual that came with

your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.

! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.

It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.

Banana plug connections

If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.

Installing your speaker system

At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).

Standard surround connection

The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.

Front right

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

Surround right

Front height right

Front wide right

Speaker B - right Speaker B - left

Front wide setting

Speaker B setting

Center Subwoofer

Front height setting

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD INBD IN

VIDEO 1 IN

TV/SAT

OUT

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

INININ

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

VIDEO 1

Not connected Not connected

Not connected Surround back

Surround back right

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ZONE 2

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

SIRIUS

R L R L R LR

SUBWOOFER

DVDY PBP

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

PRE OUT

16 .

The surround back terminals can also be used for ZONE 2.

5.1 ch surround setting

6.1 ch surround setting

7.1 ch surround setting

ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

IN1IN

)

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUND

SPEAKERS

ZONE 2 setting

Front height left

Front wide left

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

IN1IN

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

)

Single

SELECTABLE

Class 2 Wiring

SELECTABLE

Surround back left

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI

Front left

Surround left

Page 14

03 Connecting your equipment

Bi-amping your speakers

Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.

Front right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO 1 IN

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

INININ

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

High

Low

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

VIDEO 1

DVDY PBP

Subwoofer

Center

(

10/100

LAN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

SIRIUS

R L R L R LR

SUBWOOFER

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

PRE OUT

16 .

Surround right Surround left

ASSIGNABLE

)

COAXIAL

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CAUTION

! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High

to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.

! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping.

Doing so may damage your speakers.

Front left

Bi-amp compatible speaker

High

Low

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

(

)

Single

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

SELECTABLE

Class 2 Wiring

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI

Bi-wiring your speakers

Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping. ! With these connections, the Speaker System

setting makes no difference.

CAUTION

! Don’t connect different speakers from the

same terminal in this way.

! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for

bi-amping shown above.

% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.

Using a banana plug for the second connection is recommended.

Selecting the Speaker system

The front height terminals can be used for front wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to for the front height speakers. Also, the surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the surround back speakers. Make this setting according to the application.

Front height setup

*Default setting

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 64 to do this.

Front wide setup

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 64 to do this.

Speaker B setup

You can listen to stereo playback in another room.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 64 to do this.

Page 15

Connecting your equipment

Bi-Amping setup

Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.

1 Connect bi-amp compatible speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals.

See Bi-amping your speakers on page 14 .

2 Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 64 to do this.

ZONE 2 setup

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 64 to do this.

About the audio connection

Types of cables and terminals

HDMI HD audio

Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio

Digital (Optical)

Sound signal priority

RCA (Analog)

(White/Red)

! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals

can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.

Transferable audio signals

Conventional analog audio

About the video converter

The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this video source. If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ), the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then composite (in that order).

Terminal for connection with source device

HDMI IN HDMI OUT

Y PBP

High picture quality

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Video signals can be output

Terminal for connection with TV monitor

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Note

! If the video signal does not appear on your

TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 48 ) OFF.

! The signal input resolutions that can be

converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.

! Only signals with an input resolution

of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite MONITOR OUT terminals.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

About HDMI

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio. This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology. This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections. ! Digital transfer of uncompressed video

(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))

! 3D signal transfer ! Deep Color signal transfer ! x.v.Color signal transfer ! ARC (Audio Return Channel) ! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital

audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels

! Input of the following digital audio formats:

— Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High

bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD

! Synchronized operation with components

using the Control with HDMI function (see Control with HDMI function on page 43 )

Note

! An HDMI connection can only be made

with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

Page 16

03 Connecting your equipment

! If you connect a component that

is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.

! Depending on the component you have

connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.

! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable. If an HDMI

cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is used, it may not work properly.

! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer

is connected, it may not operate properly.

! Signal transfer is only possible when

connected to a compatible component.

! HDMI format digital audio transmissions

require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

! Turning on/off the device connected to this

unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.

“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

Connecting your TV and playback components

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable. If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 43 ).

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI/DVI-compatible Blu-ray disc player

DVD INBD IN

VIDEO 1 IN

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

VIDEO 1

TV/SAT

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

VIDEO 1

DVDY PBP

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

SIRIUS

SUBWOOFER

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

PRE OUT

16 .

HDMI INHDMI OUT HDMI OUT

LAN

DC OUTPUT

)

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

16 .

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

(

)

DVD

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

Select one

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

Single

SEL

Class 2 Wiring

SEL

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

AUDIO OUT

R L

ANALOG

This connection is required in order to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver.

Other HDMI/DVIequipped component

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 17 ).

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables.

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 43 ).

Page 17

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no HDMI output) to the receiver.

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

)

FRONT CENTER

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE 6

16 .

IN1IN

DVD

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

R L R L R L

HDMI

CONTROL

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

VIDEO 1

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO 1

HDMI IN

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

(

ZONE 2

DVDY PBP

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

SIRIUS

SUBWOOFER

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

PRE OUT

16 .

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables (page 16).

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you

connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

DVD player, etc.

Select one Select one

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(CD)(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

)

Single

Class 2 Wiring

SELECTA SELECTA

SPEAKERS

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Connecting your TV with no HDMI input

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the receiver. ! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with

an HDMI cable. Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component cord.

DVD player, etc.

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

Select one

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

VIDEO 1 IN

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEO

CONTROL

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO 1

TV/SAT

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/

OUT

BDR

OUT

DVD ININ

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

! Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to

input video signals.

Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI

and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables (page 16).

! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you

connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Select one Select one

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

OUT OUT

TV/SAT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

DVR/BDR IN

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

SIRIUS

SUBWOOFER

VIDEO 1

DVDY PBP

PRE OUT

LAN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

16 .

IN1IN

DVD

HDMI OUT

ASSIGNABLE

)

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

COAXIAL OPTICAL

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

Single

Class 2 Wiring

DIGITAL OUT

)

SELEC SELEC

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

Page 18

03 Connecting your equipment

C C

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources

This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

AUDIO IN ANALOG

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO 1

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

ZONE 2

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

SIRIUS

DVDY PBP

! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback

only) (page 50).

! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we

recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 16 ).

Select one

AUDIO OUT

R L

ANALOG

LAN

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

16 .

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

)

DVD

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

SELE

Class 2 Wiring

SELE

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box

Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

STB

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO 1

TV/SAT

DVD ININ

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

OUT OUT

TV/SAT

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO 1

DVR/BDR IN

DVD INBD IN

ZONE 2

DVDY PBP

! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the

receiver’s HDMI IN 1 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 16 ).

Select one

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

SIRIUS

R L R L R L

SUBWOOFER

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

PRE OUT

16 .

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

IN1IN

)

DVD

ASSIGNABLE

)

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

SELECT

Class 2 Wiring

SELECT

Page 19

Connecting your equipment

C C

Connecting other audio components

This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.

Select one

AUDIO IN

R L

ANALOG

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO 1

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

ZONE 2

DVDY PBP

! If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the

recorder.

! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD

inputs instead.

AUDIO OUT

R L

ANALOG

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

SIRIUS

R L R L R L

SUBWOOFER

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

PRE OUT

16 .

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

)

16 .

IN1IN

DVD

)

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

SELE

Class 2 Wiring

SELE

Connecting AM/FM antennas

Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality, connect external antennas (see Connecting external antennas on page 19 ).

fig. a fig. b fig. c

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the stand (fig. b).

! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a

wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.

4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.

5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket.

For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.

Connecting external antennas

To improve FM reception, connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.

75 Ω coaxial cable

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna. For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.

Outdoor antenna

Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire)

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20 ft.)

AM LOOP

Page 20

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

R L RR

( Single

)

(CD)(

DVD

) (

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

COAXIAL

SPEAKERS

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

Class 2 Wiring

SEE INST

SELECTABLE SELECTABLE

VOIR LE M

FRONT HEIG

HDMI

VIDEO

CONTROL

COMPONENT VI

VIDEO 1 IN

TV/SAT

ZONE 2

DVR/ BDR

OUT

Y P

ASSIGN ABLE

MONITOR OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

03 Connecting your equipment

MULTI-ZONE setup

This receiver can power up to two independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-ZONE connections. Different sources can be playing in two zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used. The main and sub zone have independent power (the main zone power can be off while sub zone is on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls.

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for the sub zone (ZONE 2). You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 20 for the sub zone.

MULTI-ZONE listening options

The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2:

Sub Zone Input functions available

DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, HOME MEDIA GALLERY,

ZONE 2

It is not possible to down-convert the audio and video input signals from the HDMI input terminals, digital input terminals (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input terminals and output them to ZONE 2.

iPod/USB, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT, SIRIUS

(Outputs analog audio, composite video.)

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)

% Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack, both on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

Sub zone (ZONE 2)

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

R L

Main zone

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

INININ

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

DVR/BDR I

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

VIDEO 1

DVDY PBP

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)

You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system setting on page 64 to use this setup.

% Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below.

Sub zone (ZONE 2)

VIDEO IN

Connecting a SiriusConnect

Main zone

Tuner

To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you will need to activate your SiriusConnectTM tuner.

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

R L R

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

16 .

LAN

)

FRONT CENTER

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE 6

16 .

(

)

DVD

DVD IN

DVR/BDR IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

OUT

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

SIRIUS

SUBWOOFER

VIDEO 1

DVD

PRE OUT

SiriusConnect HOME tuner

SIRIUS

You will also need to connect the antenna and AC adapter to the SiriusConnectTM tuner. ! For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio,

see Listening to Satellite Radio on page 31 .

Antenna

SIRIUS

AC adapter

Connecting to the network through LAN interface

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand. When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the network, including your computer, using HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs.

(

)

10/100

LAN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ENNA

NBAL

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

IUS

R L

UBWOOFER

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

RE OUT

16 .

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher). Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see Network Setup menu on page 66 .

LAN terminal specifications

! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

LAN

3 2 1

to LAN port

Internet

Modem

Router

LAN cable (sold separately)

WAN

Page 21

Connecting your equipment

Note

! Refer to the operation manual of

the equipment you have as the connectedequipment and connection method may differ depending on your Internetenvironment.

! When using a broadband Internet connection,

a contract with an Internetservice provider is required. For more details, contact your nearest Internetservice provider.

Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER

When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. ! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled

device must support A2DP profiles.

! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection

and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Bluetooth® ADAPTER

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

DVD IN

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

OUT

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

SIRIUS

SUBWOOFER

VIDEO 1

DVD

PRE OUT

Important

! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth

ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause damage or faulty contact.

LAN

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

16 .

IN1IN

DVD

SURROUND

ASSIGNABLE

)

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

% Switch the receiver into standby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT.

! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth

wireless technology device, see Pairing the

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device on page 33 .

Connecting an iPod

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

CONTROL ON / OFF

VIDEO 2 INPUT

MCACC

L AUDIO R VIDEO

SETUP MIC

iPod cable

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

(supplied)

iPhone

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPad



iPod

! For the cable connection, also refer to the

operating instructions for your iPod.

! For instructions on playing the iPod, see

Playing an iPod on page 28 .

Connecting a USB device

It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver. It is also possible to connect a USB keyboard (US-international layout) to the receiver to enter text in the following GUI screens. ! Change the input name in the Input Setup

menu (page 25).

! Add names to radio station presets (page 31).

CONTROL ON / OFF

VIDEO 2 INPUT

iPod

MCACC

L AUDIO R VIDEO

SETUP MIC



USB keyboard

iPhone

iPad

5V 2.1

USB

USB mass storage device

Connecting to the front panel video terminal

Front VIDEO 2 connections are accessed via the front panel using the INPUT SELECTOR or INPUT SELECT c/d button on the remote control. There are standard audio/video jacks. Hook them up the same way you made the rear panel connections.

CONTROL ON / OFF

MCACC

SETUP MIC

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

L VIDEO

AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPhone

iPad

Video camera

(etc.)

% Switch the receiver into standby then

Class 2 Wiring

use the supplied iPod cable to connect

SELECT

your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB

SELECT

terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

! It is also possible to connect using the cable

included with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view pictures via the receiver.

% Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

! This receiver does not support a USB hub. ! For instructions on playing the USB device,

see Playing a USB device on page 29 .

Page 22

03 Connecting your equipment

HDMI

VIDEO

CONTROL

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO 1 IN

TV/SAT

ZONE 2

DVR/BDR

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

DVR/ BDR

OUT

DVD ININ

INININ

OUT OUT

VIDEO 1

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

FM UNBAL 75

FRONT C

R L

AM LOOP

TV/SAT

VIDEO 1

DVDY PBP

LAN

AUDIO

SIRIUS

PRE OUT

ANTENNA

ASSIGN ABLE

OUT

MONITOR OUT

SUBWOOFER

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

ASSIGNABLE

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

16 .

ATTENTION

ENCEINTE D’IMPE 6

16 .

OUT

Connecting to a wireless LAN

Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection. Use the separately sold AS-WL300 for connection.

ASSIGNAB

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

16 .

LAN

)

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE 6

16 .

IN1IN

DVD

SURROUN

(CD)(

)

Internet

Modem

SPE

Router

WAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

ENNA

NBAL

IUS

UBWOOFER

RE OUT

OUT

! If using two remote controls (at the same

time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver.

Closet or shelving unit

Pioneer component

CONTROL

IN OUT

Non-Pioneer component

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

)

Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor

Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link components together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component. ! If you want to control all your components

using this receiver’s remote control, see page

52.

! If you have connected a remote control to the

CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO 1 IN

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

IN OUT

CONTROL

DVR/BD

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

VIDEO 1

DVDY PBP

IN OUT

CONTROL

3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many components as you have.

Important

! Note that if you use this feature, make sure

that you also have at least one set of analog

DC 5V WPS

Ethernet

Wireless LAN convereter (AS-WL300)

IR receiver

Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver. ! Remote operation may not be possible if direct

light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.

! Note that other manufacturers may not use

the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.

2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.

Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.

! If you want to link a Pioneer component to

the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 22 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.

audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes.

1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of.

When you want to control any component in the chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the corresponding remote control.

2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.

Page 23

Plugging in the receiver

Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.

CAUTION

! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do

not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.

! The receiver should be disconnected by

removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.

% Plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC power outlet.

! After this receiver is connected to an AC

outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the

Control with HDMI feature, see Control with HDMI function on page 43 .

Connecting your equipment

Page 24

04 Basic Setup

Basic Setup

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)

The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed. ! The explanations in these operating

instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).

2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup menu.

5 Select the desired language. 6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language.

The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)

The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room.

Important

! Make sure the microphone and speakers are

not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.

! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will

overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the

headphones should be disconnected.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC

Setup are output at high volume.

THX

! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

CONTROL ON / OFF

MCACC

SETUP MIC

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPhone

iPad

Microphone

Tripod

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone. Install the microphone on a stable floor. Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible:

! Sofas or other soft surfaces. ! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.

The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Speaker System : Normal(SB/FH EQ Type : SYMMETRY MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1 THX Speaker : NO

START

Exit Retu rn

)

! If you leave the GUI screen for over five

minutes, the screen saver will appear.

3 Select the parameters you want to set.

! When data measurement is taken, the

reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

! When measurement is taken of the reverb

characteristics data other than SYMMETRY, the data are not measured after the correction. If you will need to measure after correcting data, take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the

Manual MCACC setup (page 60). If the speakers are connected using any setup other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 64 .

! Speaker System – Shows the current

settings. When this is selected and ENTER is

pressed, the speaker system selection screen

appears. Select the proper speaker system,

then press RETURN to return.

If you are planning on bi-amping your front

speakers, or setting up a separate speaker

system in another room, read through

Speaker system setting on page 64 and make

sure to connect your speakers as necessary

before continuing to step 4.

! EQ Type – This determines how the

frequency balance is adjusted.

! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used

for storing surround sound settings for

different listening positions. Simply choose

an unused preset for now (you can rename it

later in Data Management on page 63 ).

! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX

speakers (all speakers other than the front

speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases,

leave at NO.

4 Press then select START.

Page 25

Basic Setup

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level.

6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this. If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 7.

! With error messages (such as Too much

ambient noise! or Check microphone.),

select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 25 ) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

Now Analyzin g... 2/9

Environmen t Check

Exit Canc el

A/V RECEIVER

Ambient No ise : OK Microphone : Speaker YES /NO :

1a.Full Auto MCACC

L : YES FHL : YES C : YES FHR : Y ES R : YES SR : YES SBR : YES SBL : YES SL : Y ES SW : YES

OK RETRY

Exit Canc el

A/V RECEIVER

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker

configuration displayed isn’t correct),

there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to change the setting and continue.

! If the speaker is not pointed to the

microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s

wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — If the connections were wrong, turn off

the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings. Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup. The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The

Advanced MCACC menu on page 58 or The System Setup and Other Setup menus on page

64 .

! Depending on the characteristics of your

room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 64 .

! The subwoofer distance setting may be

farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement

results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup

If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them. ! Some older TVs may interfere with the

operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

The Input Setup menu

You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings on page 26 ). In this case, you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4.System Setup

a.Ma nual SP S etup

b. Inpu t Set up

c. OSD Lang uage

d. Netw ork S etup

e. HDMI Set up

f. Othe r Set up

4 Select the input function that you want to set up.

The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO 1) which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.

A/V RECEIVER

4b.Input Setup

Input : DVD

Input Name : Rename Input Skip : OFF

Digital In : CO AX-1

Exit Retu rn

HDMI Input : DVD Component In : In-1

A/V RECEIVER

Exit Fin ish

Page 26

04 Basic Setup

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.

For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to OPT-2) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver.

6 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.

There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:

! Input Name – You can choose to rename the

input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so, or Default to return to the system default.

! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input

is skipped when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)

7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Input function default and possible settings

The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu on page 25 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible assignments.

Input

function

DVD COAX-1

TV/SAT OPT-1

DVR/BDR OPT-2

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2

HDMI 1 IN 1

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

iPod/USB

CD COAX-2

CD-R/TAPE

TUNER

ADAPTER

PORT

SIRIUS

a With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments

cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on page 43 ).

Input Terminals

Digital HDMI Component

(DVD)

(BD)

<a>

(DVR/

BDR)

(VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

Operation Mode Setup

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings. One of two settings can be selected for the

Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the Operation Mode setting you want.

! Expert (default) – Users can set all the

functions by themselves.

! Basic – The number of operable functions is

restricted, and functions whose operations are restricted are automatically set to achieve the Pioneer-recommended sound and picture quality. The functions that can be operated are shown below. They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions.

Operable functions/ items

HOME MENU

Full Auto MCACC

Input Name

Input Skip

Descriptions Page

Makes high precision sound field settings easily.

Input names can be changed as desired for easier use.

Inputs not being used are skipped (not displayed).

Operable functions/ items

Software Update

Network Setup

Pairing Bluetooth Setup

Audio Parameters

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

DELAY

(Sound Delay) S.RTRV

(Auto Sound Retriever)

DUAL

(Dual Mono) V.SB

(Virtual Surround Back)

V.HEIGHT (Virtual Height)

Other functions

INPUT SELECT (INPUT SELECTOR)

MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE

LISTENING MODE

PQLS

PHASE CTRL

(Phase Control)

Descriptions Page

Updates to the latest version of the software.

Checks the receiver’s IP address.

Pairs with a Bluetooth device using AS-BT100 or AS-BT200.

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory.

Adjusts the delay time of the overall sound.

Plays compressed sound with high sound quality.

Dual monaural audio setting.

Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback.

Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback.

Switches the input. 28

Use to set the listening volume.

Only Pioneer-recommended modes can be selected.

Plays using the PQLS function.

Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected.

Page 27

Operable functions/

Descriptions Page

items

SOUND RETRIEVER AIR

iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Switches the input to ADAPTER PORT and plays compressed sound with high sound quality.

Switches the input to iPod/ USB and sets the mode allowing operation from the iPod.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Home Menu.

Basic Setup

Page 28

05 Basic playback

Basic playback

Playing a source

Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.

1 Switch on your system components and receiver.

Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver (press u RECEIVER). Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Select the input function you want to play.

You can use the input function buttons on the remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.

! If you need to manually switch the input

signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 36).

3 Press to the receiver operation mode.

4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.

If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound source, you should hear surround sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.

! You may need to check the digital audio

output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.

! See also Listening to your system on page 35

for information on different ways of listening

to sources. It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed properly. For details, see Auto

Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 82 .

When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PLIIx MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals. If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.

5 Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level.

Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.

Playing a source with HDMI connection

% Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function connected to the receiver’s HDMI input terminals.

You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.

! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio

options on page 46 to THROUGH if you want

to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).

! If the video signal does not appear on your

TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have

resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, use an analog video connection.

Playing an iPod

This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver. ! This receiver is compatible with the audio

and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the iPod nano 1G/2G), iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone. However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The receiver is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.

! This receiver has been developed and tested

for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad indicated on the website of Pioneer.

! Installing software versions other than

indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility with this receiver.

! iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction

of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.

! Features such as the equalizer cannot

be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.

! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances

accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.

! When listening to a track on the iPod in the

main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting an iPod on page 21 .

! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the

iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see Switching the iPod controls on page 29 .

2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen while the

receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod. When the display shows the iPod Top menu you’re ready to play music from the iPod.

! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable

when connected to this receiver.

Playing back audio files stored on an iPod

To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver. You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver. ! Note that characters that cannot be displayed

on this receiver are displayed as #.

! This feature is not available for photos on your

iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 29 ).

Finding what you want to play

When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the iPod Top menu.

Page 29

Basic playback

2 Use i/j to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Use i/j to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).

! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels.

4 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

Note

! You can play all of the songs in a particular

category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod. ! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control

to the iPod/USB operation mode.

MEMORY MENU

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

RETURN

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

PRESET

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

PGM

PHASE

CTRL STATUS

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

! During Audiobook playback, press i/j to

switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal f Slower.

Switching the iPod controls

You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver. ! You cannot use this function, when an

iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.

1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.

This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become inactive.

2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver controls.

Note

! Change the receiver’s input to the

iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod.

Playing a USB device

It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver. ! Compatible USB devices include external

magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.

! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility

(operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting a USB device on page 21 .

! Make sure the receiver is in standby when

disconnecting the USB device.

2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen as this

receiver starts recognizing the USB device connected. When the display shows the USB Top menu you’re ready to play from the USB device.

Note

If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver. Try following the points below:

! Switch the receiver off, then on again. ! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver

switched off.

! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the

device) for USB power. If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.

Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device

The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory device. ! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist

are displayed as #.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played

back on this receiver.

! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played

back on this receiver.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.

! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control

to the iPod/USB operation mode.

MEMORY MENU

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

iPod CTRL

LIST

HOME MENU

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

PARAMETER

RETURN

VIDEO

T.EDIT

PRESET

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

PGM

PHASE

54 6

CTRL STATUS

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device

! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts. After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between play and pause (only when

Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF)).

! If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for

five minutes, the list screen reappears.

Basic playback controls

Button(s) What it does

ENTER, d

RETURN, k

<a>

Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.

Stops the player and returns to the previous menu.

Displays the previous photo content.

Page 30

05 Basic playback

Button(s) What it does

<a>

DISP

<a>

a You can only use this button when Theme on the

Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF).

Displays the next photo content.

Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.

Displays the photo information.

Slideshow Setup

Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo files here.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Select the setting you want.

! Theme – Add various effects to the

slideshow.

! Interval – Set the interval for switching the

photos. This may not be available depending on the Theme setting.

! BGM – Play music files stored on the USB

device while displaying photos.

! Music Select – Select the folder containing

the music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the USB Top menu.

About playable file formats

The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats

are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

MP3 <a>

WAV .wav LPCM

WMA .wma

a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”

b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not sup-

ported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.

.mp3

MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio

Layer-3

WMA8/9

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit

Channel 2 ch, Monaural Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Photo files

Category Extension

Meeting the following conditions: ! Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF

format)

! Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0

JPEG

.jpg

.jpeg

.jpe

.jif

.jfif

Format

Resolution 30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal

Page 31

Basic playback

Listening to the radio

The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later-see Saving station presets on page 31 for more on how to do this.

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary. 3 Tune to a station.

There are three ways to do this:

! Automatic tuning – To search for stations

in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE i/j for about a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for other stations.

! Manual tuning – To change the frequency

one step at a time, press TUNE i/j.

! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE

i/j for high speed tuning. Release the

button at the frequency you want.

Improving FM sound

If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.

Using Neural Surround

This feature uses Neural SurroundTM technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.

! While listening to FM radio, press

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround.

! The Neural Surround mode can be selected

also with STANDARD.

Tuning directly to a station

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary. 3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access). 4 Use the number buttons to enter the

frequency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.

If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over.

Saving station presets

If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.

1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.

See Listening to the radio on page 31 for more on this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking memory class.

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET k/l to select the station preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.

4 Press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.

Listening to station presets

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which

the station is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.

3 Press PRESET k/l to select the station preset you want.

! You can also use the number buttons on the

remote control to recall the station preset.

Naming station presets

For easier identification, you can name your station presets.

1 Choose the station preset you want to name.

See Listening to station presets on page 31 for how to do this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor at the first character position.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Note

! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1

to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.

! Once you have named a station preset, you

can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency.

Listening to Satellite Radio

To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your Sirius-Ready receiver. SIRIUS Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercialfree music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources. Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll need to activate it and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the SIRIUS tuner. There are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of XM” programming to the SIRIUS service. The “Best of XM” service is not available to SIRIUS Canada subscribers at this time. Please check with SIRIUS Canada for any updates using the numbers and web address below. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children. To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-

7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada. ca (Canada). SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.

Page 32

05 Basic playback

% Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input.

For best reception, you may need to move the SiriusConnectTM tuner antenna near a window (refer to the manual for the SiriusConnectTM Home tuner for antenna placement recommendations).

! If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows

Antenna Error, try disconnecting the antenna

and reconnecting. If the display shows Check Sirius Tuner, check the connection of the AC adapter and this receiver to the SiriusConnectTM tuner.

! You can check the strength of reception in

Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 32 .

Note

! In order to activate your radio subscription,

you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be found on a sticker located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have located the SID, write it down in the space provided near the end of this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the internet at: https://activate.siriusradio.com

! Follow the prompts to activate your

subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS tollfree at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).

! Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the GUI screen to

check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by genre on page 32 ).

Listening to SIRIUS Radio

After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to select channels and navigate categories using the GUI screen. ! It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to

take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer.

Selecting channels and browsing by genre

From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow your channel search by genre.

% Press i/j to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide, then navigate through the channels one at time with i/j, then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio broadcast.

! To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY,

use i/j to select a genre, then press ENTER.

! To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.

Note

! You can select channels directly by pressing

D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.

! You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio

information in the front panel display.

! The currently selected channel is

automatically chosen (without pressing ENTER) after 10 seconds.

Saving channel presets

This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 channels each.

1 Select the channel you want to memorize.

See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on page 32 .

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows a blinking memory class.

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press k/l to select the channel preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.

4 Press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.

Note

! You can also press MEMORY during

reception display to save the information of up to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 32 to recall this information.

! You can reset the Channel presets, Memory,

Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 50 .

Listening to channel presets

1 Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.

2 Press k/l to select the channel preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the channel preset.

Using the SIRIUS Menu

The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio features.

1 Press TOP MENU. 2 Use i/j to select a menu item, then

press ENTER.

Choose from the following menu items:

! Channel Skip/Add – Use i/j and ENTER

to select channels you would like to remove/ restore from/to the channel guide.

! Parental Lock – Use i/j and ENTER to

select channels you would like to place under parental lock. Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly inputting their channel number and providing the parental lock password.

! Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of

satellite and terrestrial reception.

! Memory Recall – Use i/j to browse your

saved song information.

! Password Set – Set the parental lock

password.

3 When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to the reception display.

Page 33

Basic playback

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music

Device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology:

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER

VSX

Digital music player + Bluetooth audio transmitter (sold commercially)

Bluetooth

ADAPTER

-1021

MASTER VOLUME

Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device: cell phone

Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: Digital music player

Music data

This receiver

ADVANCED

FL OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

MCACC

SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER

PHONES

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

SOUND

ADVANCED

STANDARD

AUTO SURR/ALC/

iPod iPhone iPad

CONTROL

RETRIEVER AIR

SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

DIRECT

PUSH OPEN

Remote control operation

Wireless music play

When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also, by using a commercially available transmitter supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, you can listen to music on a device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also

be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T type Bluetooth wireless technology.

Remote control operation

The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media, and perform other operations. ! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles.

! Remote control operations cannot be

guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device

“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared. The pairing step is necessary to register the

Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications. For more details,

see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device. ! Pairing is required when you first use the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing

should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.

! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s

security code is “0000”, there is no need to make the security code setting on the receiver. Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit

complies with Bluetooth Specifications Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver.

2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without the need for inputting a password. In this case, a passcode may be displayed on this receiver and on the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, check that the same passcode is displayed on this receiver and the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, then select YES with the k and l keys and press ENTER. After this, also perform the connection operation on the Bluetooth device to be connected. If the passcode does not match the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to be connected, select NO to cancel pairing, then try starting over. Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! Pair one unit at a time. ! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth

connections with a device equipped with the Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not connect any devices other than this receiver by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth- equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is already established with a device other than this receiver, disconnect the other device before connecting this receiver.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER. 4 Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then

press ENTER.

5 Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.

Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth wireless technology device you wish to connect.

! 0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from

these options. These are the passcodes that can be used in most cases.

! Others – Select to use a passcode other than

those mentioned above.

6 If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter the passcode.

Use i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.

7 Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair, place it near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.

8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is connected:

CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.

! The system can display alphanumeric

characters only. Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not connected:

Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In this case, perform the connection operation from the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

9 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected in step 5.

! The passcode may in some cases be referred

to as PASSKEY or PIN code.

Page 34

05 Basic playback

Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with your system

1 Press ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.

! The ADAPTER PORT input can also be

selected by pressing SOUND RETRIEVER AIR on the receiver. In this case, the optimum listening mode (SOUND RETRIEVER AIR) is selected automatically.

! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged

into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is selected.

2 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operation to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.

3 Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on Bluetooth wireless technology devices.

! Bluetooth wireless technology device should

be compatible with AVRCP profile.

! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless

technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons.

MEMORY MENU

PGM

HDD DVD

PHASE

CTRL STATUS

TV / DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 322

AUDIO

4 While listening to a source, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Page 35

Listening to your system

Important

! The listening modes and many features

described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

Auto playback

There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.

% While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for auto playback of a source.

AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the dis-

play before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed. ! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! When listening to the FM radio, the Neural

Surround feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural Surround on page 31 for more on this).

! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT

input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is

selected automatically. ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels. Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to

be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

Note

! When ALC is selected, the effect level can

be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Listening in surround sound

Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.

Standard surround sound

The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.

% While listening to a source, press STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).

If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode. ! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! If the surround back speakers are not

connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes

2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound). With two channel sources, you can select from: ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to

movie sources ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to

music sources ! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to

video games

! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound

(sound from the surround speakers is mono)

! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (front height)

! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1

channel sound (front wide), especially suited to movie sources

! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (front wide), especially suited to music sources

! Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound

(surround back), especially suited to movie sources

! Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround

back), especially suited to music sources

! Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound

(surround back), especially suited to music sources

! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound

settings and you can still use the audio options.

With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers, you can select (according to format):

! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above ! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back

channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)

! DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel

playback with DTS-ES encoded sources

! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel

playback with DTS encoded sources

! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel

playback

! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above ! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above ! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above ! STEREO – See above ! Straight Decode – Plays back without the

effects above.

Note

! When listening sources in

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 46 ).

! When listening to 2-channel sources in

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 46 to adjust them.

! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6

Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 46 ).

! Neural Surround can be selected for

2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel sources.

! The stereo mode can also be selected by

pressing the STEREO button on the remote control.

! When listening through headphones, you can

select STEREO mode only.

Using the Advanced surround effects

The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.

% Press ADV SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.

! ACTION – Designed for action movies with

dynamic soundtracks

! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of

dialog

Page 36

06 Listening to your system

! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots

of special effects

! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from

mono soundtracks

! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources ! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo

field

! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound

for both mono and stereo TV sources

! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video

games

! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs ! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type

sound

! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for

rock and/or pop music

! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music

sources

! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a

stereo source, using all of your speakers

! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich

surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.

! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround

sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.

FOCUS position (Recommended)

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

WIDE position

Front left speaker

! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for

listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device. The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only selected when the ADAPTER PORT input or listening through headphones.

Front right speaker

! PHONES SURR – When listening through

headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.

Note

! When an Advanced Surround listening mode

is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS,

F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR, the effect level cannot be adjusted.

! The Front Stage Surround Advance

(F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE) function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.

Using Stream Direct

Use the Stream Direct modes when you want

to hear the truest possible reproduction of a

source. All unnecessary signal processing is

bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog

or digital sound source.

Processing differs depending on the input sig-

nal and whether or not surround back speakers

are connected. For details, see Auto Surround,

ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal

formats on page 82 .

% While listening to a source,

press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT

(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to

select the mode you want.

Check the digital format indicators in the front

panel display to see how the source is being

processed.

! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on

page 35 .

! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode

(page 35).

! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the

source with the least modification next

to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC system and the Phase Control effect.

! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified

sound from source with only minimal digital treatment. No sound is output from the Speaker B in this mode.

Note

! When listening through headphones, you can

select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only.

Selecting MCACC presets

! Default setting: MEMORY 1 If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

1 Press to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press MCACC.

Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets. See Data Management on page 63 to check and manage your current settings.

! These settings have no effect when

headphones are connected.

! You can also press k/l to select the

MCACC preset.

Choosing the input signal

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below. ! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital,

PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTSEXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.

! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD,

DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 15) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.

! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals.

For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

! AUTO – The receiver selects the first

available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.

! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal. ! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial

digital signal.

! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter

is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this

receiver. When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the signal being decoded (see Display on page 9 ).

Page 37

Listening to your system

Better sound using Phase Control

This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound. Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.

The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.

Note

! Phase matching is a very important factor

in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.

! The PHASE CONTROL feature is available

even when the headphones are plugged in.

! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch,

set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.

! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your

subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on

your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.

! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you

may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.

! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to

ON in the following cases:

— When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched

on.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is

set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Page 38

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Playback with HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery

This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you to listen to audio files or listen to Internet radio stations on a computer or other component connected to the receiver’s LAN terminal. This chapter describes the setup and playback procedures required to enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component. ! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must

sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.

! Photo or video files cannot be played back. ! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows

Media Player 12, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.

Features of Home Media Gallery

This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals.

1 Playback the music files stored in PCs

You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit. dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 38 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 39 .

! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio

files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA 1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).

2 Listening to Internet radio stations

You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products. dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 38 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 39 .

Introduction

About playable DLNA network devices

The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following: ! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP

with Windows Media Player 11 installed

! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with

Windows Media Player 12 installed

! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on

PCs or other components) Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media Server) as described above can be played via command from an external Digital Media Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this

DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital Media Renderers). This receiver supports this DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such operations as playing and stopping files can be performed from the external controller. Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons, including the MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE and DISP). ! Depending on the external controller being

used, playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted from the controller. In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

About the DHCP server function

To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup menu on page 66 for more on this.

Authorizing this receiver

In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.

Playback with Home Media Gallery

Important

! When you play back audio files,

‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file.

! In case a domain is configured in a Windows

network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.

! There are cases where the time elapsed may

not be correctly displayed.

1 Press HMG to select Home Media Gallery as the input function.

It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network. The following screen appears when the Home Media Gallery is selected as the input function. The number next to

indicates the number of connected servers.

Top Menu

A/V RECEIVER

Inte rnet Radi o

*** ***

Favo rite s Rece ntly Play ed Setu p

1/5

! The server without the mark cannot be

accessed.

2 Use i/j to select the category you want to play back, and then press ENTER.

Select a category from the following list:

! Internet Radio – Internet radio ! Server Name – Server components on the

network

! Favorites – Favorite songs currently being

registered

Page 39

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

! Recently played – Internet Radio listening

history (most recent 20 incidents) Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.

3 Use i/j to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then press ENTER.

Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN. When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed. Only audio files with the In case of the folders with the

mark can be played.

mark, use i/j and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files.

4 Repeat step 3 to play back the desired song.

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.

! Internet radio stations – See Listening to

Internet radio stations on page 39 .

! Server – See Playing back audio files stored on

components on the network on page 39 .

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network

You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.

! Press HMG to switch the remote control to the

HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

PRESET

RETURN

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

MEMORY MENU

PGM

PHASE

CTRL STATUS

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

Listening to Internet radio stations

Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed, and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region. Depending on the Internet line conditions, the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio.

About list of Internet radio

The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner on page 84 .

Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations

You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See Advanced operations for Internet radio on page 40 for more on this. ! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must

have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.

! The port number varies depending on the

Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.

! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the

vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.

! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted

depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.

Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site

With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.

To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 38 .

2 Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.

3 Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, then press ENTER.

The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of this address. The following can be checked on the Help screen:

! Get access code – The access code required

for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed.

! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering

on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and password are displayed.

! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the

information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations, re-register after resetting.

4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registration process.

http://www.radio-pioneer.com Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions on the screen.

5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s screen.

Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.

Playing back your favorite songs

You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder. Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.

Page 40

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder

Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped. The selected song is then registered in the Favorites folder. Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be registered. To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder, select the song you want to delete from the folder, and press CLR. The selected song is then deleted from the Favorites folder.

Advanced operations for Internet radio

Saving Internet radio stations

This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations that you often listen to in seven classes (A to G) with up to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum capacity.

1 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want to save.

Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following Steps 1 to 3 on page 38.

2 Press T.EDIT to switch to the stationsaving mode.

3 Press CLASS to select the class that you want to save the station in.

Select the desired class from A to G.

4 Use i/j to select the number that you want to save the station as, and then press ENTER.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. Select the desired number from 1 to 9.

Retrieving saved Internet radio stations

You need to save Internet radio stations first before retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations currently being saved, see Saving Internet radio stations on page 40 and save at least one Internet radio station before proceeding with the following steps.

1 Select the class that you want to retrieve an Internet radio station from.

Each time you press CLASS, the class switches to A to G in turn.

2 Use i/j to select the station number that you want to retrieve.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. ‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select an Internet radio station currently not being saved.

About network playback

The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:

Windows Media Player

See Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Player 12 on page 84 for more

on this.

Windows Media DRM

Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management (WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver content for playback on computers, portable devices and network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting WMDRM.

Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property, including

copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

DLNA

DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home. The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information.

DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

Content playable over a network

! Even when encoded in a compatible format,

some files may not play correctly.

! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back. ! There are cases where you cannot listen to an

Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations.

! Some functions may not be supported

depending on the server type or version used.

! Supported file formats vary by server. As such,

files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit. For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.

Disclaimer for Third Party Content

ACCESS TO THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES, INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED FEATURES AND FUNCTIONALITIES, IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” “AS AVAILABLE” AND AT THE USER’S OWN RISK, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PIONEER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CONNECTION WITH ACCESS TO AND USE OF CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. PIONEER DOES NOT GUARANTEE, REPRESENT, OR WARRANT THAT CONTENT SERVICES WILL BE FREE FROM ERRORS, INTERRUPTION, LOSS, CORRUPTION, ATTACK, VIRUSES, INTERFERENCE, HACKING, OR OTHER SECURITY INTRUSION, AND PIONEER DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE FOREGOING. PIONEER IS NOT LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING FROM ACCESS

Page 41

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

TO OR USE OF CONTENT. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY PIONEER OR ITS CUSTOMER SERVICES REPRESENTATIVES WILL CREATE ANY SUCH WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER, ITS AFFILIATES, OR THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, OR EMPLOYEES BE LIABLE IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH THIS DEVICE FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR ATTORNEY’S FEES, LOST DATA OR LOST PROFITS, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED $10.00. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IF ANY APPLICABLE AUTHORITY HOLDS ANY PORTION OF THIS SECTION TO BE UNENFORCEABLE, THEN LIABILITY WILL BE LIMITED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.

About playback behavior over a network

! Playback may stall when the PC is switched

off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.

! If there are problems within the network

environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed or played properly (playback may be interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a 100BASETX connection between player and PC is recommended.

! If several clients are playing simultaneously,

as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.

! Depending on the security software installed

on a connected PC and the setting of such

software, network connection may be blocked. Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to communication error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider.

“Windows Media

” is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®7, Windows®Vista, Windows®XP, Windows®2000, Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

About playable file formats

The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server. ! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this

case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

MP3 <a>

LPCM

WAV .wav LPCM

WMA .wma

AAC

.mp3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3

—

.m4a .aac .3gp .3g2

LPCM

WMA2/7/8

WMA9

MPEG-4 AAC LC MPEG-4 HE AAC (aacPlus v1/2)

Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit Channel 2 ch Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 192 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit Channel 2 ch Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Page 42

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 96 kHz Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit

FLAC .flac FLAC

a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

Channel 2 ch Bitrate — VBR/CBR —

Page 43

Control with HDMI function

About the Control with HDMI function

Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray disc player or with a component of another make that supports the Control with HDMI functions are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. ! The receiver’s volume can be set and the

sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

! The receiver’s input switches over

automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,

when the TV’s power is set to standby.

Important

! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI

functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.

! You cannot use this function with components

that do not support Control with HDMI.

! We only guarantee this receiver will work

with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components and components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function. However, we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function.

! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you

want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Control with HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used.

! For details about concrete operations,

settings, etc., refer to also the operating instructions for each component.

Making Control with HDMI connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and up to five other components. ! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to

the audio input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on

page 43 ). For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 16 .

Important

! When connecting this system or changing

connections, be sure to switch the power off

and disconnect the power cord from the wall

socket. After completing all connections,

connect the power cords to the wall socket. ! After this receiver is connected to an AC

outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI

initialization process begins. You cannot carry

out any operations during this process. The

HDMI indicator in the front panel display

blinks during this process, and you can turn

on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.

When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,

you can skip this process. For details about the

Control with HDMI feature, see Control with

HDMI function on page 43 .

! To get the most out of this function, we

recommend that you connect your HDMI

component not to a TV but rather directly to

the HDMI terminal on this receiver.

! While the receiver is equipped with five

HDMI inputs (DVD, BD, DVR/BDR, VIDEO 1, HDMI 1), the Control with HDMI function can only be used with up to three DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three DVD or Blu-ray disc recorders.

HDMI Setup

You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMIcompatible components in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER. 4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.

Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function. When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF.

! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI

function. When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the Control with HDMI function, the audio and video outputs from the HDMI connection are output from the TV.

! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled.

Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output.

5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.

Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for all linked functions or the PQLS function only.

However, Display Power Off will activate the settings set forth in step 6 below.

! ALL – Enabled for all linked functions. ! PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.

When PQLS is selected, link functions other than the PQLS function may not work properly. If you wish to use all link functions, select ALL.

6 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.

If the TV’s power is turned off while using the Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s power is also turned off (all power off function). This function can be disabled.

! YES – The all power off function is enabled.

The receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power. This function only works when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.

! NO – The all power off function is disabled.

The receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power is turned off.

7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.

It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMIconnected player to the TV when this receiver’s power is on standby as long as Control is ON, but the amount of energy consumed rises. It is, however, possible to minimize energy consumption when power is set to standby.

! Normal – Regular setting. Power-up time

from standby is short.

! Eco – Conserves energy while standby.

Power-up time is longer than when set to

Normal.

8 Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want.

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.

Page 44

08 Control with HDMI function

! Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the

Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs.

! via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the

HDMI terminal. This can only be selected when Control is set to ON.

9 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.

Before using synchronization

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:

1 Put all components into standby mode. 2 Turn the power on for all components,

with the power for the TV being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.

4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.

About synchronized operations

The Control with HDMI-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below. ! From the menu screen of the Control with

HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played through this receiver, and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, you

can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s remote control.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the

synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be played through the receiver from the TV’s menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When the synchronized amp mode is

canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the

synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.

! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the

receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.)

! The receiver’s input switches automatically

when the Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s input switches automatically

when the TV’s input is switched.

! The synchronized amp mode remains in

effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other than one connected by

HDMI. The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs. ! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the

sound is muted, the volume status is displayed

on the TV’s screen. ! When the OSD language is switched on

the TV, the receiver’s language setting also

switches accordingly.

About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a TV of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of the Control with HDMI functions may not work.) ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the

receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV)

! The sound of TV programs or an external

input connected to the TV can also be output from the speakers connected to the receiver. (If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, this requires connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in

addition to the HDMI cable.) The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function. ! When playback starts on the player or

recorder, the receiver’s input switches to

the HDMI input to which that component is

connected. See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support the Control with HDMI function.

Setting the PQLS function

PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with HDMI function. It offers

higher-quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission. ! On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream,

PQLS always works for all sources.

! On players compatible with PQLS Multi

Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio output to Linear PCM.

! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,

PQLS only works when playing CDs. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information. This function is activated when Control is set to ON. ! If a listening mode other than

AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,

PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected while

the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is

disabled. ! When this receiver is connected by HDMI

cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible

with the PQLS function via HDMI connection

and HDMI reauthentication is performed

(the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect

is enabled and the listening mode is set to

AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other

than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,

PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected.

% Press on the remote control, then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting.

The setting is displayed on the front panel display. ! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision

quartz controller in this receiver eliminates

distortion caused by timing errors (jitter),

giving you the best possible digital-to-analog

conversion when you use the HDMI interface.

This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-

compatible players. ! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.

Page 45

Cautions on the Control with HDMI function

! Connect the TV directly to this receiver.

Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

! Only connect components (Blu-ray disc

player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input

in The Input Setup menu on page 25 is automatically set to OFF.

! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON,

even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver, but only when a Control with HDMIcompatible component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light.

Control with HDMI function

Page 46

09 Using other functions

Using other functions

Setting the Audio options

There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the

current source, settings and status of the receiver.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER. 2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use k/l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Audio parameter menu

Setting What it does Option(s)

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

(Acoustic Calibration EQ)

S-WAVE

(Standing Wave)

Phase C+

(Phase Control Plus)

DELAY

(Sound Delay)

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed.

Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.

Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.

For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function corrects for phase shifting on such discs.

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.

c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6. MEMORY 6 d Default: M1. MEMORY 1

OFF

c 0 to 16 (ms) d Default: 6ms

c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d

1 second = 30 frames (NTSC)

Default: 0.0

Setting What it does Option(s)

BYPASS

c –6 to +6 (dB) d Default: 0 (dB)

OFF

c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/ UP4 d Default: OFF

CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only CH1 CH2 – Both channels

heard from front speakers

OFF

AUTO

MAX MID OFF

TONE

(Tone Control)

BASS

<a>

TREBLE

<a>

S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever)

DNR

(Digital Noise Reduction)

DIALOG E

(Dialog Enhancement) <c>

DUAL

(Dual Mono)

Fixed PCM

DRC

(Dynamic Range Control) <d>

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely. This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is STEREO, Auto surround (STEREO) or SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

Adjusts the amount of bass.

Adjusts the amount of treble.

With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation. When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the USB memory audio and HOME MEDIA GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve high sound quality.

May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on. This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.

Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem to relocate upwards.

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.

This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance. When ON is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.

Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).

Page 47

Using other functions

Setting What it does Option(s)

Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from

LFE

(LFE Attenuate)

SACD GAIN

<e>

HDMI

(HDMI Audio) <f>

A.DELAY

(Auto delay) <g>

C.WIDTH

(Center Width) (Applicable only when using a center speaker) <h>

DIMENSION

<h>

PANORAMA

<h>

C.IMAGE

(Center Image) (Applicable only when using a center speaker)

EFFECT

the speakers. The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.

Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range (during digital processing).

Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.

Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).

Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).

Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.

Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).

Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).

c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/ –10dB/ –5dB/ 0dB d Default: 0dB

0dB

+6dB

AMP

THROUGH

OFF

c 0 to 7 d Default: 3

c –3 to +3 d Default: 0

OFF

c 0 to 10 d Defaults: Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 Neo:6 CINEMA: 10

c 10 to 90 d Defaults: EXT.STEREO: 90 Others: 50

Setting What it does Option(s)

H.GAIN

(Height Gain)

V.SB (Virtual Surround Back) <j>

V.HEIGHT (Virtual Height) <k>

a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON. b With the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to

ON.

c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of

effects depends on the listening mode.

d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than

Dolby TrueHD.

e You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch

the gain setting back to 0dB. f ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations. ! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input

signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page

44 . g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing

capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and

adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufac-

turer directly. h Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode. i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode. j ! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when

any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected. ! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set

to NO or if Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is

selected at Speaker System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button. ! When inputting Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD or DTS Express audio signals, the Virtual Surround Back mode cannot

be used if no surround signals are recorded in the source. k ! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the

stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected. ! The Virtual Height mode cannot be used when no surround speaker is connected. It can also not be used

when playing signals containing actual front height channel information. ! When inputting Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD or DTS Express audio signals, the Virtual Height mode cannot be

used if no surround signals are recorded in the source.

Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to HIGH, the sound from the top will be more emphasized.

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information.

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

LOW

MID

HIGH

OFF

Page 48

09 Using other functions

Setting the Video options

There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to

the current source, setting and status of the receiver.

! All of the setting items can be set for each input function. ! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER. 2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use k/l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Video parameter menu

Setting What it does Option(s)

OFF

AUTO

PURE 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p

AUTO

ON OFF

c –4 to +4 d Default: 0

V.CONV

(Digital Video Converter) <a>

RES

(Resolution)

PCINEMA

(PureCinema) <c>

P.MOTION

(Progressive Motion) <c>

Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 15).

Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch).

This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to ON or OFF.

Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.

Setting What it does Option(s)

V.ADJ

(Advanced Video Adjust)

YNR

<d, e>

DETAIL

<d, e>

SHARP

(Sharpness) <d, f>

BRIGHT

(Brightness) <d, f>

CONTRAST

<d, f>

HUE

<d, f>

CHROMA

(Chroma Level) <d, f>

BLK SETUP

(Black Setup) <g>

ASP

(Aspect) <h>

a If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF.

b ! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some

cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.

! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)

connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (see About the video converter on page 15 ).

! If this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals are

output from the component output terminals. ! PURE is selected when HDMI signals are being input. c ! This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output. ! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON. ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i or 576i analog video signals

d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY.

Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays, LCD for liquid crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for professional monitors. If you want to adjust the picture quality settings to your personal tastes, select MEMORY.

Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.

Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture.

Adjusts the overall brightness.

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.

Adjusts the red/green balance.

Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.

Sets the black level according to the video input signal. Normally select 7.5. If the dark parts of the picture are all black with this setting, select 0.

Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).

PDP

LCD FPJ PRO MEMORY c 0 to +8 d

Default: 0 c –4 to +4 d

Default: 0

c 0 to +8 d Default: 0

c –6 to +6 d Default: 0

7.5

THROUGH

NORMAL

Page 49

Using other functions

e ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i or 576i analog video signals

f ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals — 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals

g This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks. h ! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the

monitor.

! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.

Switching the speaker terminals

If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker

system setting on page 64 , you can switch between speakers using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.

% Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting.

As mentioned above, if you have selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off. Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:

When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select from:

! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height

channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front height channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are

added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added

to the front, center and surround channels

(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can select from:

! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide

channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are

added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added

to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

When you select Speaker B, you can select from:

! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels (including surround back channels), depending on the source).

! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two

speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel sources will not be heard.

! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

Note

! The subwoofer output depends on the settings

you made in Manual speaker setup on page 64 . However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).

! All speaker systems (except

Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on page 49 .

1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.

Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:

! ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE

feature on

! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-

ZONE feature off The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.

2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

! When the receiver is on, make sure that any

operations for the sub zone are done while

ZONE 2 shows in the display. If this is not

showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.

3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the sub zone.

For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected to the CD-R/TAPE inputs to the sub room (ZONE 2) .

! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner

controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets on page 31 if you’re unsure how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2, use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone.

5 When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.

You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.

! You won’t be able to switch the main zone

off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.

! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE

feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.

MULTI-ZONE remote controls

Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 to operate the ZONE 2. The following table shows the possible MULTIZONE remote controls:

Button(s) What it does

Switches on/off power in the sub zone.

Page 50

09 Using other functions

Button(s) What it does

INPUT SELECT

Input function buttons

MASTER VOLUME +/–

<a>

MUTE

<a>

a You can only use this button when Speaker System

is set to ZONE 2.

Use to select the input function in the sub zone.

Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the sub zone.

Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

Making an audio or a video recording

You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV). Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on page 11 for more on connections). ! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the

tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.

! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and

can only be recorded in analog.

! Some video sources are copy-protected. These

cannot be recorded. Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using Component video

if your source has also been connected using Component video.

1 Select the source you want to record.

Use the input function buttons (or

INPUT SELECT).

2 Prepare the source you want to record.

Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.

3 Select the input signal according to the signal to be recorded.

Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.

4 Prepare the recorder.

Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels. Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically-check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.

5 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.

Reducing the level of an analog signal

The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound. The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.

% Press to the receiver operation mode, then press A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.

Using the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the

receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.

% Press to the receiver operation mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.

30 min 60 min

Off 90 min

! You can check the remaining sleep time at

any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again.

! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If

any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.

Dimming the display

You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.

% Press to the receiver operation mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.

! You can also choose to turn the display off. In

this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.

Checking your system settings

Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current MCACC preset.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press STATUS to check the system settings.

The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each: Input

Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC preset d ZONE 2 input.

2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF. ! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device

from the receiver beforehand.

1 Switch the receiver into standby. 2 While holding down ENTER on the

front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l, then press ENTER on the front panel.

The display shows RESET? OK.

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

OK appears in the display to indicate that the

receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.

! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the

receiver is unplugged.

Default system settings

Setting Default

Digital Video Converter ON SPEAKERS SB/FH

Speaker System

Front SMALL Center SMALL

Speaker Setting

Surround Position IN REAR Crossover 80 Hz

FH/FW SMALL Surr SMALL SB SMALLx2 SW YES

Normal(SB/ FH)

Page 51

Using other functions

Setting Default

X-Curve OFF DIMMER Brightest

Inputs

See Input function default and possible settings on page 26 .

HDMI

HDMI Audio Amp Control ON Control Mode PQLS Display Power Off NO

DSP

Power On Level LAST Volume Limit OFF Mute Level FULL Phase Control ON

iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA

Auto Sound Retriever

Sound Delay 0.0 frame Dual Mono CH1 DRC AUTO SACD Gain 0 dB LFE Attenuate 0 dB Auto delay OFF Digital Safety OFF

Effect Level

2 PL II Music Options

Neo:6 Options Center Image

GALLERY, ADAPTER PORT input function

Other input functions

ExtendedStereo 90 Other modes 50 Center Width 3 Dimension 0 Panorama OFF

OFF

Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 Neo:6 CINEMA: 10

Setting Default

2 PL IIz Options

All Inputs

See also Setting the Audio options on page 46 for other default DSP settings.

MCACC

MCACC Position Memory

Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 10’00’’

Standing Wave (M1 to M6)

EQ Data (M1 to M6)

Height Gain MID Listening Mode

(2 ch/multi ch) Listening Mode

(Headphones)

ATT of all channels/filters

SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB All channels/

bands EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB

AUTO SURROUND

STEREO

M1: MEMORY 1

0.0 dB

Page 52

10 Controlling the rest of your system

Controlling the rest of your system

About the Remote Setup menu

The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the respective items.

Setting What it does

Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control

Preset recall

Code learning

Multi operation

System off

codes of a number of other devices (including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated. See Selecting preset codes directly on page 52 .

If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly. See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 53 .

A series of the remote control operations for starting listening or viewing can be programmed. Multiple remote control codes can be set for the different input functions. See Multi Opera- tion and System Off on page 54 .

This is a function for automatically turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver. Multiple remote control codes can be set, as desired. See Multi Operation and System Off on page 54 .

Setting What it does

This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit’s operation screen, without changing the receiver’s input,

Direct function

Erase learning

Reset function

All reset

Change RC mode

when the remote control unit’s input function buttons are pressed. This is convenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver. See Direct function on page 54 .

This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned. Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 53 .

This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input functions. See Erasing all learnt set- tings that are in one input function on page 53 .

This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 55 .

If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on page 52 .

Note

! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by

pressing RCU SETUP.

! After one minute of inactivity, the remote

automatically exits the operation.

Operating multiple receivers

Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver’s remote control when using multiple receivers, provided they are of the same model as this receiver. The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting. ! Set the remote modes on the receivers before

using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 68 ).

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘4’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the number button for the receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you wish to operate.

For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’. If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. When the preset code is input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed.

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote. However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming sig- nals from other remote controls on page 53 ). ! For greater convenience, assign the TV

connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/ cable receiver or set-top box connected to the TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input button. If a single device is connected to both terminals, that device should be assigned to both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.

! Devices may be assigned to the following

input function buttons.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR HDMI

SAT

USB

iPod

TUNER

INPUT SELECT

ADPTHMG

CDTV

TV CTRL

SIRIUS

RECEIVER

ZONE2

Selecting preset codes directly

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘1’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV CTRL here. The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

Page 53

Controlling the rest of your system

3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit preset code.

See Preset code list on page 86 . If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.

4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code. The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only). Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

ENTER

PGM

PHASE

54 6

807 9

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

RETURN

MEMORY MENU

CTRL STATUS

AUDIO

DIMMER

CLASS

ENTER

T.EDIT

PRESET

INFO

DISP

MULTI OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR HDMI

SAT

CD HMGTV

USB

iPod

TUNER

SIRIUS

ZONE2

SELECT

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

INPUT

TV CONTROL

VOL

MUTE

SOURCERECEIVER

ADPT

TV CTRL

RECEIVER

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

DIRECT

LISTENING MODE

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘2’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, remaining lit.

! The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch)

apart.

3 cm

This receiver’s remote control

(1 inch)

Other remote control

4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.

! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means

the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 53 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

! Note that interference from TVs or other

devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

! Some commands from other remote controls

cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 2 through 4.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘7’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press ENTER.

The LED flashes once.

3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons. 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing

mode.

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function

This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input function, and restores the factory default. This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘9’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Page 54

10 Controlling the rest of your system

Direct function

! Default setting: On You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player. When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input function buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without affecting the receiver.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘5’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

3 Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the direct function mode.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.

4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.

Multi Operation and System Off

The Multi operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system. ! Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices

or perform programming signals for other remote controls before multi operation

memory programming (page 53). The Multi operation feature makes it easy to perform the following operations by pressing just two buttons. Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD input function button to:

1. Switch this receiver on.

2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.

3. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands. Similar to Multi operations, System off allows you to use two buttons to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time. Only one System off operation sequence may be programmed. Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE to:

1. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands.

2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs). For greater convenience, program this receiver to perform power on/off and playback operations on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The signals for Pioneer devices described above are not contingent on programming for nonPioneer devices.) The buttons that can be programmed using Multi operation or System off are the same buttons as those that can be programmed for other remote controls (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 53 ).

Note

! Before Multi operation and System off will

work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 52 for more on this).

! Some units may take some time to power up,

in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

! Power on and off commands only work with

components that have a standby mode.

! Some remote controllers for other

manufacturers’ devices use the same signals for switching the power on and off. In some cases, even if this receiver is programmed to perform these commands, power to the nonPioneer devices may not be switched on and off correctly. Program the receiver to perform these commands if the non-Pioneer device uses separate signals for power on/off.

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘3’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button (or u SOURCE button).

For Multi operations, press the input function you wish to program (for example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD).

! With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL

settings cannot be made. For other settable input functions, see Setting the remote to

control other components on page 52 .

For System off, press the u SOURCE button.

The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.

3 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input function).

4 Select the button for the command you want to input.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

! You don’t need to program the receiver to

switch on or off. This is done automatically. With Pioneer components, you don’t need to program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders).

5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a sequence of up to five commands.

If you press RCU SETUP before programming is completed, commands programmed up to that point will be stored.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Using multi operations

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Within five seconds, press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

Using System off

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Within five seconds, press u SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch

Page 55

Controlling the rest of your system

off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the zones becomes off).

! In order to avoid accidently switching off a

DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

Erasing the settings for the multi-operation

This erases all the settings programmed in the remote control for the multi-operation.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘8’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button containing the program you want to cancel or the u SOURCE button for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Resetting the remote control settings

Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default. ! When preset codes are set, all the signals

learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘0’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Default preset codes

Input function button Preset code

DVD BD DVR/BDR HDMI TV/SAT CD TV CTRL

2158 2160 2150 2159 0116 5066 0116

Page 56

10 Controlling the rest of your system

Controlling components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 52 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select

the component.

! The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the

TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR HDMI

SAT

USB

iPod

INPUT

TV CONTROL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

CDTV

TUNER

SIRIUS

ZONE2

SELECT

INPUT

VOL

TOOLS

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

HOME

TUNE

MEMORY MENU

PGM

PHASE

CTRL STATUS

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

DIMMER

807 9

CLASS

ENTER

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

LISTENING MODE

RECEIVER

ADPTHMG

TV CTRL

RECEIVER

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

RETURN

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

PRESET

TV and Audio/Video components

Button(s) TV TV (Monitor) BD/DVD

u SOURCE

Number buttons

POWER ON/ OFF

numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics

k (dot) k (dot)

ENTER (CLASS)

CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

POWER ON/ OFF

KURO LINK CLEAR + —

HDD/BDR/ DVR

POWER ON/ OFF

VCR

POWER ON/ OFF

EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU — LIST

TOOLS/ GUIDE/EPG

USER MENU

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

TOOLS <a>

GUIDE — GUIDE

—

HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU — HOME MENU

RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN — RETURN

HDD (Red) Red Red — HDD — Red DVD (Green) Green Green — DVD — Green

(Yellow)

(Blue)

AUDIO

DISP

Yellow Yellow — VCR — Yellow

Blue Blue MENU MENU — Blue

— — — AUTO SETUP — FREEZE — — — — ANT AV SELECTION — SCREEN SIZE

d d d d

e e e e

g g g g

m m m m

n n n n

o o

p p

— —

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —

OUTPUT

CH +/–

CH +/– CH +/–

RESOLUTION +/–

CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–

<a>

a Controls for BD.

SAT/ CATV

POWER ON/ OFF

i/j/k/l

DISPLAY/ INFO

Page 57

Controlling the rest of your system

Audio/Video components

Button(s) LD

u SOURCE Number buttons numerics numerics numerics —

k (dot)

ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

d d d d d

e e e e e

g g g g g

m m m m m

n n n n n

o o o o o

p p p p p

AUDIO

DISP

a Controls for MD. b Controls for SACD.

POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF

+10 >10/CLEAR

TOP MENU — —

—

ENTER — — —

—

RETURN — — —

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CD/CD-R/ SACD

LEGATO LINK

— —

SACD SETUP

PURE AUDIO

TIME

MD/DAT TAPE

CLEAR <a>

OPEN/CLOSE <a>

—

— —

CLEAR

ENTER

MSc

MSd

e/g/m/n

TV (Projector)

Button(s) TV (Projector)

u SOURCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

k (dot)

ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

AUDIO DISP CH +/–

POWER ON MOVIE STANDARD DYNAMIC USER1 USER2 USER3 COLOR+ SHARP+ GAMMA COLOR– SHARP–

EXIT

INFO

ENTER

TEST

HIDE

MENU HDMI1 HDMI2 COMP. VIDEO S-VIDEO BRIGHT– BRIGHT+

POWER OFF ASPECT CONTRAST+/–

Page 58

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before. Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence. This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the

Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 for a quick and effective

automatic surround setup.

! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC

(Expert) on page 58 for a more detailed

MCACC setup.

! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker

settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 60 ).

! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors

occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 , you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

Important

! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not

moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

! The screen saver will automatically appear

after five minutes of inactivity.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup

are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER.

If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 58 .

2 Select the parameters you want to set.

Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to set.

! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL

(recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting (to save time) if you want. — When data measurement is taken (after

selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverb characteristics data (both beforeand after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

— When measurement is performed

with other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted, so the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”), take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup (page 60).

— The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is

also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 61 for more on this.

— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

! EQ Type (only available when

the Auto MCACC Menu above is

EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how

the frequency balance is adjusted. After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels). If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.

! THX Speaker (only available when the

Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or

Speaker Setting) – Select YES when using

THX speakers (all speakers other than the

front speakers are set to SMALL). In other

cases, leave at NO.

! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available

when the Auto MCACC Menu above

is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to

measurements at the listening position,

you can use two more reference points for

which test tones will be analyzed for standing

waves. This is useful if you want to get a

balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating

positions in your listening area. Place the

microphone at the reference point indicated

on-screen and note that the last microphone

placement will be at your main listening

position:

Page 59

The Advanced MCACC menu

3rd reference point

2nd reference point

1 2

Main listening position

3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

CONTROL ON / OFF

MCACC

SETUP MIC

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPhone

iPad

Microphone

Tripod

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

! It may not be possible to measure correctly

if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.

4 When you’re finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

! With error messages (such as Too much

ambient noise! or Check microphone.),

! Do not adjust the volume during the test

tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have. If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker

configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to change the setting and continue.

! If the speaker is not pointed to the

microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s

wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — If the connections were wrong, turn off

the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point

setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.

9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page

64). ! Depending on the characteristics of your

! The subwoofer distance setting may be

farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room

characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results

are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we

recommend adjusting the settings manually. You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the

MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking MCACC Data on page 62 ).

Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to the Home Menu. Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.

Page 60

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

Manual MCACC setup

You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 . You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC

setup are output at high volume.

Important

! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent

setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.

! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to

connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver.

! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC

Setup on page 25 for notes regarding high

background noise levels and other possible interference.

! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and

turn up the volume to the middle position.

1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu.

See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 58 if you’re not already

at this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.

! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments

to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel Level on page 60 ).

! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay

settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page 60 ).

! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant

low frequencies in your listening room (see

Standing Wave on page 60 ). The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 61 :

! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency

balance of your speaker system while

listening to test tones (see Acoustic

Calibration EQ Adjust on page 61 ).

! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system

based on the direct sound coming

from the speakers and make detailed

settings according to your room’s reverb

characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional on page 61 ).

Fine Channel Level

! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels) You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 64 .

1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.

2 Adjust the level of the left channel.

This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels.

! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be

output.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference

speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,

simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Fine Speaker Distance

! Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers) For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of each speaker in half inch increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 64 .

1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to

make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.

! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting

the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.

! For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a

continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).

When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference

speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,

simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Standing Wave

! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters) Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly

Page 61

The Advanced MCACC menu

resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets. ! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot

be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.

! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which

you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).

! TRIM (only available when the filter channel

above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate for the difference in output post-filter).

! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter

parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust

! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/

bands) Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the

adjustment provided in Automatically conduct- ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 58 , you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes.

1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.

Use i/j to select the channel. Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and press k to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the channel.

! The OVER! indicator shows in the display

if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until OVER! disappears from the display.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Note

! Changing the frequency curve of one channel

too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the

lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as shown at Type A below, or when different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B.

! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low

frequencies

Level

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Low frequencies

High frequencies

Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range

160

Time (in msec)

! Type B: Reverb characteristics for

different channels

Level

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Front L

Front R

Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range

160

Time (in msec)

Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.

2 Select an option and press ENTER.

! Reverb Measurement – Use this to

measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration.

! Reverb View – You can check the reverb

measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel. — If the Reverb View procedure is

performed after the Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 or

Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the

reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function.

! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the

time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 58 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.

3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.

The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View:

! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb

characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver (before calibration).

! EQ ON – You will see the reverb

characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area.

Page 62

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

— The calibration corresponding to the

currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.

— After auto calibration with EQ Type

: SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with

EQ ON. When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 74 for troubleshooting information.

4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.

The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted. Use k/l to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use i/j to go back and forth between the three. The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After. Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.

5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired time setting for calibration, and then select START.

! To specify the place where the MCACC

memory is to be stored, press MCACC to

select the MCACC memory you want to store. Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for

the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting. Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to switch between them. Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,

20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all

channels during calibration. When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish. After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.

Checking MCACC Data

At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 , the procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 58 or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 60 , you can

check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the setting you want to check.

! Speaker Setting – Used to check the

settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 62 for more on this.

! Channel Level – Used to check the output

level of the different speakers. See Channel Level on page 62 for more on this.

! Speaker Distance – Used to check the

distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on page 62 for more on this.

! Standing Wave – Used to check the

standing wave control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 63 for more on this.

! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check

the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 63 for more on this.

4 Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Home Menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 64 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 Select the channel you want to check.

Use i/j to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.

Channel Level

Use this to display the level of the various channels. See Channel Level on page 65 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Speaker Distance

Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance on page 65 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Page 63

The Advanced MCACC menu

Standing Wave

Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing Wave on page 60 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control.

The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Acoustic Cal EQ

Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 61 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel.

The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Data Management

This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position). This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV). From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.

! This can be done in Automatically conducting

optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on

page 24 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 58 , either of which you should have already completed.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC

presets for easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on page 63 ).

! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from

one MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data on page 63 ).

! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC

presets that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on page 63 ).

Renaming MCACC presets

If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.

1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.

Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to select a preset name.

3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.

You will return to the Data Management setup menu.

Copying MCACC preset data

If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 60 ), we recommend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.

! The settings made in Automatically conducting

optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on

page 24 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 58 .

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the setting you want to copy.

! All Data – Copies all the settings of the

selected MCACC preset memory.

! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel

level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy them (‘To’).

Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.

When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not copied. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

Clearing MCACC presets

If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.

Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.

When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

Page 64

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

The System Setup and Other Setup

menus

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu

The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the

Home Menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of

connection used for surround back terminals

and the size, number distance and overall

balance of the connected speakers (see

Manual speaker setup on page 64 ).

! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve

connected to the digital, HDMI and

component video inputs (see The Input Setup

menu on page 25 ).

! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display

language can be changed (see Changing the

OSD display language (OSD Language) on

page 24 ).

! Network Setup – Conducts the setup

necessary to connect this unit to the network (see Network Setup menu on page 66 ).

! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver

with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI (page 43).

! Other Setup – Makes customized settings

to reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup menu on page 68 ).

Manual speaker setup

This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers). These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 , it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup

are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 64 if you’re not already at

this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Speaker System – Specifies how you are

using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker terminals (page 64).

! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and

number of speakers you’ve connected (page

64).

! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance

of your speaker system (page 65).

! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance

of your speakers from the listening position (page 65).

! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your

speaker system for movie soundtracks (page

66).

3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Speaker system setting

! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH) There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.

1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 64 if you’re not already at

this screen.

2 Select the speaker system setting.

! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home

theater use with front height speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home

theater use with front wide speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker

terminals to listen to stereo playback in

another room (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 49 ).

! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re

bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 14 ).

! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back

speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 49 ).

3 If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement of the surround speakers.

In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position, the surround sound of

5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be. Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.

! ON SIDE – Select when the surround

speakers is positioned right beside you.

! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker

is positioned obliquely behind you.

4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.

If No is selected, the setting is not changed. You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conduct- ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.

Page 65

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all

speakers to SMALL.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.

Use k/l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:

! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers

reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.

! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker

reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to the front speakers).

! FH – Select LARGE if your front height

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height speakers, choose NO (the front height channel is sent to the front speakers). — You can adjust this setting only

when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FH).

— If the surround speakers are set to NO,

this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers). — You can adjust this setting only

when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FW).

— If the surround speakers are set to NO,

this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).

! SB – Select the number of surround back

speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO. — If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp

(in Speaker system setting on page 64 ) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.

— If the surround speakers are set to

NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.

! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of

channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from other speakers). — If you have a subwoofer and like lots of

bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in

the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by

selecting SMALL for the front speakers. If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Also, the center, surround, surround back, front height and front wide speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.

3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.

Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).

! This setting decides the cutoff between bass

sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.

! With Full Auto MCACC setup

or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics.

! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that

the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Channel Level

Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

The test tones will start.

2 Adjust the level of each channel using k/l.

Use i/j to switch speakers. Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.

! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL)

meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Note

! You can change the channel levels by press

to the receiver operation mode, then press CH LEVEL, and then using k/l on the remote control.

Channel level adjustment using CH LEVEL

and k/l is meant as a convenient way to temporarily fine-adjust the sound being played. This adjustment is not stored in the MCACC memory’s channel level setting.

Speaker Distance

For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

Page 66

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using k/l.

You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1/2 inch Increments.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Note

! For best surround sound, make sure the

surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.

X-Curve

Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.

1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.

Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:

Room size (ft2)

X-Curve (dB/oct)

! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be

flat and the X-Curve has no effect.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000

–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0

Network Setup menu

Setting up the network to listen to Internet radio on this receiver.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/

Proxy of this receiver (page 66).

! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator

or iControlAV function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode (page 67).

! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver

displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network can be changed (page 67).

! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network

functions (page 67).

! Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the

wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP address settings (page 67).

For the wireless LAN converter, use the

separately sold AS-WL300.

IP address/Proxy setting

In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router (with a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on the DHCP server function, and you will not need to set up the network manually. You must set up the network as described below only when you

have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function. Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or the network manager for the required settings. It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component. ! In case you make changes to the network

configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network settings of this receiver.

Note

! Press i/j or the numeric buttons to

enter alphanumeric characters. To delete alphanumeric characters entered one at a time, press CLR.

IP Address

The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254 Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254 Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway

In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.

Primary DNS Server/ Secondary DNS Server

In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the ‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter ‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS server address field.

Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port

This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Port’ field.

1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select the DHCP setting you want.

When you select ON, the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps

3. Proceed with Step 4. If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON, this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to determine the IP address.

! The IP address determined by the Auto IP

function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio station if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.

3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server.

Press i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.

4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server.

In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 5.

Page 67

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.

6 Enter the port number of your proxy server.

Use the numeric buttons to enter the port number.

7 Select ‘ON’ to confirm the IP Address/ Proxy setup.

Network Standby

This setting allows the AVNavigator or iControlAV function for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.

! ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV function

can be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

! OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV

function cannot be used when the receiver is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce power consumption in the standby mode).

Friendly Name

1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select ‘Rename’.

If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default, select Default.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Parental Lock

Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions.

Important

When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is selected, the setting made here cannot be reflected. Set the input to something other than HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this setting.

1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Input the password.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off.

! OFF – Internet services are not restricted. ! ON – Internet services are restricted.

4 If you want to change the password, select Change Password.

In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.

Wireless LAN Converter

This setting is required for connecting a wireless LAN converter to the receiver and using wireless network functions. For the wireless LAN converter, use the separately sold AS-WL300.

Access Point Setting

Make the connection settings for the wireless LAN converter connected to the receiver and the access point. Connect the wireless LAN converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the “IP Address, Proxy” settings menu beforehand (page 66). There are four way to make the settings for connecting to the access point, as shown below.

! WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made

automatically simply by pressing the WPS buttons on the access point and wireless LAN converter, following the instructions displayed on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest way of making the settings, and is possible when the access point and wireless LAN converter are equipped with WPS buttons.

! WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of

connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings are made by inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the receiver’s screen to the access point to which you want to connect.

! Search for Access Point – Display a list of

the SSIDs of connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings with the access point are made by setting the access point’s security protocol, security key and WEP default key (only when the access point’s security protocol is WEP).

! Manual Setting – Connection settings are

made by manually inputting the SSID, security protocol, security key and WEP default key of the access point to which you want to connect.

WLAN IP Address

If the IP address of a device connected in the LAN other than the wireless LAN converter is set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of the wireless LAN converter will be redundant, making connection to the access point impossible. In this case, use this setting to set an IP address specific to the wireless LAN converter.

1 Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Make the wireless LAN converter settings as necessary.

When making the connection settings of the wireless LAN converter and access point, select

“Access Point Setting” and make the connec tion settings for the wireless LAN converter and access point following the instructions on the screen. If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address, select “WLAN IP Address” and input the IP address.

Checking the Network Information

The setting status of the following networkrelated items can be checked. ! IP Address – Check the IP address of this

receiver.

! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of

this receiver.

! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 67 . ! SSID – Check the SSID of the access point

connected with the wireless LAN converter (only when a wireless LAN converter is connected).

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the Home Menu.

Display the setting status of the network-related items.

Page 68

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

The Other Setup menu

The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER. 4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn

off automatically when the receiver is not being used.

! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related

operations of this receiver (page 68).

! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this

receiver’s remote control mode (page 68).

! Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way

the GUI screen looks (page 68).

! Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device (page 33).

! Software Update – Use to update the

receiver’s software and check the version.

5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Auto Power Down

The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver. When using ZONE

2, the ZONE 2 power can also be set to turn off, but for ZONE 2 the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have been performed. Different times can be set for the main zone and ZONE 2.

1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off.

! MAIN – The time can be selected from

among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and “OFF”. The power turns off after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time.

! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from

among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, “6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power turns off after the selected time.

Volume Setup

You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on.

1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.

The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.

! LAST (default) – When the power is turned

on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off.

! “---” – When the power is turned on, the

volume is set to minimum level.

! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to

be set when the power is turned on, in steps of 0.5 dB.

It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup (see below).

3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.

Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).

! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not

limited.

! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum

volume is limited to the value set here.

4 Select the Mute Level setting you want.

This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.

! FULL (default) – No sound. ! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be

turned down to the level specified here.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Remote Control Mode Setup

! Default setting: 1 This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used.

1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.

3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote control mode.

4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.

See Operating multiple receivers on page 52 .

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Flicker Reduction Setup

! Default setting: OFF The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting. Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.

1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Software Update

Use this procedure to update the receiver’s software and check the version. There are two ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB memory device. Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file. This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet. Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer, reading this file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. With this procedure, the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. ! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer

website, download it onto your computer. When downloading an update file from the Pioneer website onto your computer, the file will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before saving it on the USB memory device. If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models on the USB memory device, delete them.

Page 69

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Important

! DO NOT unplug the power cord during

updating.

! When updating via the Internet, do not

disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via a USB memory device, do not disconnect the USB memory device.

1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the update procedure.

! Update via Internet – The receiver checks

whether updatable software is available via the Internet.

! Update via USB Memory – The receiver

checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel contains updatable software.

“Accessing” is displayed and the update file

is checked. Wait a while.

3 Check on the screen whether or not an update file was found.

If “New version found.” is displayed, the update file has been found. The version number and updating time are displayed. If “This is the latest version. There is no need to update.” is displayed, no update file has been found.

4 To update, select OK.

The updating screen appears and updating is performed.

! The power turns off automatically once

updating is completed.

Status messages

FILE ERROR

UPDATE ERROR 1 to UPDATE ERROR 7

Update via USB

UE11 UE22 UE33

Descriptions

Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again. If the error still occurs, try using a different USB memory device.

Turn the receiver’s power off, then turn it back on and try updating the software again.

If this message flashes, updating has failed. Update via a USB memory device. Put the update file on a USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port. When the file is found, software updating starts automatically.

Updating has failed. Use the same procedure to update the software again.

Software Update messages

Status messages

NO UPDATE FILE

Descriptions

No update file was found on the USB memory device. Store the file in the USB memory device’s root directory.

Page 70

13 Additional information

Additional information

Troubleshooting 1

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work. ! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the

power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

Power

Symptom Remedy

The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power

Power cannot be turned off. (ZONE 2 ON is displayed.)

The receiver suddenly switches off or the iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks.

During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.

The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on.

outlet. Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in. Press the remote control’s ZONE 2, then press u RECEIVER to

switch the Zone 2 off. Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching

the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Turn down the volume. Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC

setup on page 60 . Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on

the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY cOFFd to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.

Try switching the receiver off, then back on again. Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again. The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the

receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Symptom Remedy

The receiver suddenly switches off or the

FL OFF indicator blinks.

OVERHEAT blinks in the display or AMP OVERHEAT and the FL OFF indicator flash

and the power turns off.

OVERHEAT shows in the display and the power turns off.

The receiver suddenly power off or ADVANCED MCACC flashes.

There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the power. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is turned on.)

Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.

Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again. The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.

Try moving the unit for better ventilation (see page 2). Lower the volume level. The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and

call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

No sound

Symptom Remedy

No sound is output when an input function is selected. No sound is output from the front speakers.

No sound from the surround or center speakers.

Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).

Make sure the correct input function is selected. Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected. Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to

hear any other signal format (see Setting the Audio options on page 46 ).

Check that the source component is connected properly (see Con- necting your equipment on page 11 ).

Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ).

Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 35 ).

Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 64 ).

Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 65 ). Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on

page 13 ).

Page 71

Additional information

Symptom Remedy

No sound from surround back speakers. Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or

No sound from front height or front wide speakers.

No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and

SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 64 ).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.

Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B.

When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or

Normal(SB/FW) and SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the surround back speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON or SP: SB ON (see

Switching the speaker terminals on page 49 ). Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to

LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 64 ).

When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: SB ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the front height or front wide speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON, SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 49 ).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ).

the volume turned up. If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off. Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker

Setting on page 64 ). The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher

to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 64 ).

If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 64 ).

Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on page 46 ).

Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 65 ).

Symptom Remedy

No sound from one speaker. Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on

Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).

No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/DTS software is played back.

No sound when using the Home Menu. If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting

page 13 ). Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 65 ). Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting

on page 64 ). The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of

the advanced effect listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 35 ).

Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 36 ).

Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Check the digital output settings on the source component. If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure

this is not turned down. Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/

DTS discs. Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output set-

tings of your BD or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.

If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

the Home Menu.

Other audio problems

Symptom Remedy

Speaker switching sound (clicking sound) is heard from receiver during playback.

Broadcast stations cannot be selected automatically, or there is considerable noise in radio broadcasts.

Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and surround back speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound bothers you, we recommend to change the speaker terminal option (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 49 ).

Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.

Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 19). Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna. Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such

as a fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.

Page 72

13 Additional information

Symptom Remedy

Noise is output when scanning a DTS CD. This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your

When playing a DTS format LD there is audible noise on the soundtrack.

Can’t record audio. You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an

Subwoofer output is very low. To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the

Everything seems to be set up correctly, but the playback sound is odd.

The Phase Control feature doesn’t seem to have an audible effect.

Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input.

Can’t select some Input functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control.

There seems to be a time lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer.

The maximum volume available (shown in the front panel display) is lower than the +12dB maximum.

player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.

Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choos- ing the input signal on page 36 ).

analog recording from an analog source. For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t

copy protected.

front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 64 ). The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative

speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ).

If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).

Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 65 ).

Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference.

Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).

Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page 68 ).

The channel level setting may be over 0.0dB.

ADAPTER PORT terminal

Symptom Remedy

The Bluetooth wireless technology device cannot be connected or operated. Sound from the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not emitted or the sound is interrupted.

Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object emitting the electromagnetic waves.

Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that obstructions are not set between the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit. Set the Blue- tooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance

between them is less than about 10 m (33 ft.) and no obstructions exist between them.

Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly connected.

The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Bluetooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.

Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.

Video

Symptom Remedy

No image is output when an input is selected.

Check the video connections of the source component. For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV

and another component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 48 ), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.

Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Check the video output settings of the source component. Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct. Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions

that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 48 ) and/or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 48 ) to OFF.

Page 73

Additional information

Symptom Remedy

Can’t record video. Check that the source is not copy-protected.

The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during

Video signals are not output from the component terminal.

scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.

When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following: — Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal. — Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting the Video options on page 48 ). — Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals. Input the video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component terminals. When using the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Settings

Symptom Remedy

The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error.

After using the Auto MCACC Setup, the speaker size setting is incorrect.

Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Distance setting (page 60) properly.

The display shows KEY LOCK ON when you try to make settings.

Most recent settings have been erased. The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting

The various system settings are not stored.

The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 25 ). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 64).

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.

To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following: — The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue. — If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.

Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 64 , and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 58 if this is a recurring problem.

Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).

With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 10 seconds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.

this setting. Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all

the zones before unplugging the power cord. Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The

settings will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord.)

Page 74

13 Additional information

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output

Symptom Remedy

The reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration does not appear entirely flat.

EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup on page 60 do not appear to change the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration.

Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for SMALL speakers.

There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.

Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.

The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.

Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration. However, these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.

Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.

Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.

Display

Symptom Remedy

The display is dark or off. Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness. You can’t get DIGITAL to display when

using SIGNAL SEL.

2 DIGITAL or DTS does not light when playing Dolby/DTS software.

When playing Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the receiver’s format indicators do not light.

When playing certain discs, none of the receiver’s format indicators light.

Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

These indicators do not light if playback is paused. Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the

source component. Check that the player is connected using a digital connection. Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choos-

ing the input signal on page 36 ). Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS

sources are converted to PCM. Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby

Digital or DTS is selected. The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc

packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.

Symptom Remedy

When playing a disc with the listening mode set to Auto Surround or ALC, 2 Pro Logic II or DTS Neo:6 appear on the receiver.

During playback of DVD-Audio, the display shows PCM.

The power turns off automatically and some indicator flashes, or some indicator flashes and the power does not turn on.

Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 36 ).

If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.

This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.

See the Power section (page 70).

Remote control

Symptom Remedy

Cannot be remote controlled. Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it

Other components can’t be operated with the system remote.

matches the setting on the main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on page 52 ).

Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 68 ).

Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 6 ).

Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 ft.) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 6 ).

Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.

Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.

Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 22 ).

If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.

The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.

When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the learning function, in some cases they may not be learned properly. In this case, register the commands again using the learning function (see page 53). If they still do not work, they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device using another remote control.

Page 75

Additional information

HDMI

Symptom Remedy

The HDMI indicator blinks continuously. Check all the points below. No picture or sound. This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you

No picture. Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options

No sound, or sound suddenly ceases. Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the

are connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or composite video jacks.

Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color or other setting for your component.

While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.

To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed

Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with

HDMI the Deep Color feature.

on page 48 ).

Audio options on page 46 ). If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for

the audio. If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate

connection for the audio. Check the audio output settings of the source component. HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to

be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

Symptom Remedy

Noisy or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during

HDCP ERROR shows in the display. Check whether or not the connected component is compatible

When Control with HDMI is set to ON, the TV/SAT input’s HDMI Input assignment is canceled.

Synchronized operation not possible using Control with HDMI function.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.

Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON, the HDMI input is assigned for the BD, DVD, DVR/BDR and VIDEO 1 inputs regardless of the Control with HDMI setting, so use these terminals.

Check the HDMI connections. The cable may be damaged. Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on

page 43 ). Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI

Setup on page 43 ). Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power. Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating

instructions).

Page 76

13 Additional information

Troubleshooting 2

AVNavigator

Symptom Causes Remedy

AVNavigator cannot be installed.

Software updating does not operate well.

AVNavigator does not interact well with the receiver.

When the Wiring Navi, Interactive Manual, Glossary or Software Update is launched, a warning about security protection appears on the browser.

An error message may appear if there are not enough system resources available.

Installation of AVNavigator may fail because of incompatibilities with other applications.

There may be a problem with your Internet Service Provider’s network.

The receiver’s power is not turned on.

The receiver or computer is not connected to the LAN.

The router’s power is off. Turn the router’s power on. AVNavigator’s network set-

tings are not correct.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

This is because of the browser’s security function.

Re-start the PC, then start the installer (AVNavigator_e_ver_*_*.exe) with no other applications active.

Try the following, in the order indicated.

1. If there are any other applications active, exit the other applications and try starting the installer (AVNavigator_e_ver_*_*.exe) again.

2. If that does not work, try restarting your PC, and starting the installer (AVNavigator_e_ ver_*_*.exe) with no other applications active.

Contact your contracted provider.

Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60 seconds after the power turns on for network functions to start.)

Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer (page 20).

If your router does not support DHCP, the receiver’s IP address must be set in AVNavigator. First set the IP address on the receiver, then set the same address in AVNavigator (page 66).

Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

This is not a problem. Perform the operation to authorize the blocked contents.

USB interface

Symptoms Causes Remedies

The folders/files stored on a USB memory device are not displayed.

A USB memory device is not recognized.

A USB memory device is connected and displayed, but the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back.

Cannot detect USB keyboard. The USB keyboard is routed

Cannot enter correct text using the USB keyboard.

The folders/files are currently stored in a region other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.

The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.

There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in a USB memory device.

The audio files are copyrighted. Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB

The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications.

A USB hub is currently being used.

This receiver recognizes the USB memory device as a fraud.

Some formats of USB memory devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, cannot be played back on this receiver.

The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver.

through a USB hub.

A PS2 keyboard is routed through a PS2/USB connector.

Keyboard is not a USB HID Class device.

Keyboard is not US-international layout keyboard.

Store the folders/files in the FAT region.

Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 8 (page 29).

Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 29).

memory device cannot be played back (page 29).

Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications. Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications are not played back on this receiver (page 29).

Connect the USB memory device and switch on this receiver (page 21).

This receiver does not support USB hubs (page 29).

Switch off and on again this receiver.

Check whether the format of your USB memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver (page 29).

See the list of file formats that can be played back on this receiver (page 30).

This receiver is not compatible with USB hubs. Plug the keyboard directly into the receiver.

PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this receiver, even if routed through a PS2/USB connector. Use a USB keyboard.

Some devices will not be detected. Use a USB HID Class keyboard.

Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB: Some characters cannot be entered.

Page 77

Additional information

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

Symptoms Causes Remedies

Cannot access the network. The LAN cable is not firmly con-

Playback does not start while “Connecting...” continues to be displayed.

The PC or Internet radio is not properly operated.

The audio files stored on components on the network, such as a PC, cannot be played back.

nected. The router is not switched on. Switch on the router. Internet security software is cur-

rently installed in the connected component.

The audio component on the network which has been switched off is switched on.

The component is currently disconnected from this receiver or the power supply.

The corresponding IP address is not properly set.

The IP address is being automatically configured.

Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 is not currently installed on your PC.

Audio files were recorded in formats other than MP3, WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, and WMA.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12.

The component connected to the network is not properly operated.

The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing.

The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 20).

There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed.

Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver.

Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power supply.

Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your router, or set up the network manually according to your network environment (page 66).

The automatic configuration process takes time. Please wait.

Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 on your PC (page

38). Play back audio files recorded in MP3, WAV

(LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA. Note that some audio files recorded in these formats may not be played back on this receiver.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player

12. Try using another server. Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server.

Check whether the component is affected by special circumstances or is in the sleep mode. Try rebooting the component if necessary.

Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network.

Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network.

Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

Symptoms Causes Remedies

Cannot access the component connected to the network.

Audio playback is undesirably stopped or disturbed.

Cannot access Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12.

The component connected to the network is not properly set.

There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network.

The audio file currently being played back was not recorded in a format playable on this receiver.

The LAN cable is currently disconnected.

There is heavy traffic on the network with the Internet being accessed on the same network.

When in the DMR mode, depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when a volume operation is performed from the controller.

In case of Windows Media Player 11: You are currently logged onto

the domain through your PC with Windows XP or Windows Vista installed.

In case of Windows Media Player 12: You are currently logged onto

the domain through your PC with Windows 7 installed.

If the client is automatically authorized, you need to enter the corresponding information again. Check whether the connection status is set to “Do not authorize”.

Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network.

Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format supported by this receiver. Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted. Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed (page

41). Connect the LAN cable properly (page 20).

Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the network.

In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine (page 38).

Page 78

13 Additional information

Symptoms Causes Remedies

Cannot listen to Internet radio stations.

The Home Media Gallery cannot be operated with the buttons on the remote control.

The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation.

You are currently disconnected from the Internet.

The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or interrupted.

The remote control is not currently set to the Home Media Gallery mode.

Check the firewall settings for components on the network.

Check the connection settings for components on the network, and consult with your network service provider if necessary (page 66).

There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Internet radio stations on this receiver (page 39).

Press HMG to set the remote control to the Home Media Gallery mode (page 38).

SIRIUS radio messages

Status messages Causes Remedy

Antenna Error

Check Sirius Tuner

Acquiring Signal

Subscription Updating

Updating Channels

Invalid Channel

Firmware Updating

The SIRIUS antenna is not properly connected.

The SiriusConnect properly connected.

The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current location.

Unit is updating subscription. Wait until the encryption code has been

Unit is updating channels. Wait until the encryption code has been

Selected channel is not available/ does not exist.

The SiriusConnect firmware is being updated.

tuner is not

tuner’s

Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.

Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter are attached securely.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the SIRIUS antenna to get better signal reception. Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna position.

updated.

updated. Select another channel.

Wait for updating to finish.

Wireless LAN

Status messages Causes Remedy

Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN.

Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on. (Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” and “Wireless” indicators are not all lit.)

WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver’s display window.

The LAN cable is not firmly connected.

Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or there is an obstacle between them.

There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless LAN environment.

Multiple wireless LAN converters are connected to the wireless LAN router.

Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the receiver’s DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN terminal is properly connected.

There is a problem with the wireless LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the receiver’s power off, then disconnect the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver’s power back on.

If WLAN POW ERR is still displayed after repeating the above procedure several times, there is a problem with the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 22).

Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit closer together, etc.

Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or others device generating electromagnetic waves.

Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as much as possible when using the system with the wireless LAN.

When connecting multiple wireless LAN converters, their IP addresses must be changed. For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the first wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249”, the second wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.248”, using values between 2 and 249 (such as “249” and “248”) that are not assigned to other wireless LAN converters or to other devices.

Page 79

Additional information

Status messages Causes Remedy

Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN.

Wireless LAN connections cannot be established between the wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.).

The wireless LAN converter is properly connected to the receiver and the wireless LAN converter’s indicators are lit, but the wireless LAN converter cannot be set from the receiver (the settings screen cannot be displayed).

The IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter do not match the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc.

The wireless LAN converter must be set in order to establish wireless LAN connections. See Wireless LAN Converter on page 67 .

If DHCP in the receiver’s IP settings is set to OFF and the IP address has been set manually, the IP address set in the wireless LAN converter may not match. In the receiver’s IP settings, set DHCP to ON. After the setting is completed, turn the receiver’s power off. Next, turn the receiver’s power back on and check whether the wireless LAN converter’s settings can be displayed with the receiver. If the settings can be displayed, change the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter as necessary.

Check the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter (including the DHCP setting). If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power back on. Check that the IP addresses of the receiver and wireless LAN converter match the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc. If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, set an IP address matching the network of the base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.). For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the receiver’s IP address to “192.168.1.XXX” (*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”, the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”. Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249” (*2). (*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to a number between 2 and 248 that is not assigned to other devices. (*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to a number between 2 and 249 that is not assigned to other devices.

Status messages Causes Remedy

Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN.

Try making the wireless LAN converter’s advanced settings.

The access point is set to conceal the SSID.

The access point’s security settings use WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.

Network connections cannot be established even when the above measures are taken.

The wireless LAN converter can be connected to a computer to make the advanced wireless LAN settings. For details, see the CD-ROM included for the wireless LAN converter. Check the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc., then change the settings of the wireless LAN converter. Note, however, that making the advanced wireless LAN settings will not necessarily improve the wireless LAN environment. Be careful when changing the settings.

In this case, the SSID may not be displayed on the access point list screen. If not, set the SSID, etc., by making the wireless LAN converter settings on the receiver manually.

The receiver does not support WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.

Reset the wireless LAN converter. After this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s settings. About resetting

1. Check that the wireless LAN converter’s power is on.

2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s reset button for at least 3 seconds.

3. Release the reset button. When the wireless LAN converter is restarted, the resetting procedure is completed.

Page 80

13 Additional information

About status messages

Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Home Media Gallery.

Status messages Descriptions

STARTING H.M.G.

Connection Down File Format Error Track Not Found Server Error Server Disconnected empty Preset Not Stored Out of Range License Error

Item Already Exists

Favorite List Full

If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:

! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on. ! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10

seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)

A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected. Wait for a while.

The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed. Cannot be played back for some reasons. The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network. The selected server cannot be accessed. The server has been disconnected. There are no files stored in the selected folder. The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved. The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings. The license for the contents to be played back is invalid. This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites

folder has already been registered. This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites

folder but the Favorites folder is already full.

Important information regarding the HDMI connection

There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-equipped component you are connecting-check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information). If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the following configurations when connecting up.

Configuration A

Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s component video input. The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal for transmission to the display. For this configuration, use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections.

Note

! The picture quality will change slightly during

conversion.

Note

! If your display only has one HDMI terminal,

you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component.

! Depending on the component, audio output

may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit (for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).

! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll

have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit.

! Since the sound is muted on the display when

using the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions.

Cleaning the unit

! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off

dust and dirt.

! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft

cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.

! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide

sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will corrode the surface.

Configuration B

Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections. Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration.

Page 81

Additional information

Surround sound formats

Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

About iPod

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc.

About SIRIUS

About FLAC

FLAC Decoder

Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: ! Redistributions of source code must retain the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce

the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation

nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 82

13 Additional information

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats

The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 36 ) you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback

Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT

DVD-A sources As above As above

SACD sources As above Stereo playback

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback

Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT

DVD-A sources As above As above

SACD sources As above Stereo playback

Auto Surround / ALC /

DIRECT

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA

2 Pro Logic II MOVIE 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA

PURE DIRECT

Multichannel signal formats

Input signal format Auto Surround / ALC PURE DIRECT / DIRECT

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1 channel

flagged)

DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel

flagged)

DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding) Straight decoding Straight decoding

DTS-HD sources As above As above

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM Straight decoding Straight decoding

SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding) As above As above

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above

a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

<a>

DTS-ES (Matrix) DTS-ES (Matrix)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

<a>

Page 83

Additional information

Glossary

Audio formats/Decoding

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.

Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontallyoriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of threedimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources.

DTS Neural Surround

DTS Neural Surround can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV).

Decoding

A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording

by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into the original signals. The term “decoding” (or “matrix decoding”) is also used for the technology which converts 2-channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel signals into 6.1 or 7.1 channels.

Calibrating the sound field/ Improving the sound quality

Phase Control

The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position.

Virtual Surround Back

Virtual Height

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

Auto Sound Retriever

The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression. With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality.

Sound Retriever Air

Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending Bluetooth signals.

PQLS

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with HDMI connections.

ALC (Auto Level Control)

In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels. Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

Front Stage Surround Advance

With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality of the original sound.

MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.

HDMI

Control with HDMI function

sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

! The receiver’s input switches over

automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,

when the TV’s power is set to standby.

Page 84

13 Additional information

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal. The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection with the TV can be completed with a single HDMI cable.

Network function

DLNA

vTuner

vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the following website: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

“This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.”

aacPlus

AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)

FLAC

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC without any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC, visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/

Windows Media

Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows. Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.

Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Player 12

Windows Media Player is software to deliver music, photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to home stereo systems and TVs. With this software, you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your home. This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s website. ! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or

Windows Vista) ! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7) For more information check the official Microsoft website.

Windows Media DRM

Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights Management) service for the Windows Media platform. It is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or video content over an IP network to a PC or other playback device in such a way that the distributor can control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected content can only be played back on a component supporting the WMDRM service.

Router

A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network. In homes, routers often also function as DHCP servers. Products with built-in wireless LAN access points are called “wireless LAN routers”.

DHCP

Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for automatically assigning such setting information as IP addresses within network connections. This offers convenience in that, when enabled, it allows network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network.

Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi

“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition of wireless LAN standards. With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years, Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. As a way of reassuring users, products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo “Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is assured.

WPS

Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry group for a function allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless LAN devices and encryption to be made with simple operations. There are a number of methods, including push-button configuration and PIN code configuration. This AV receiver supports both push-button configuration and PIN code configuration.

SSID

Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wireless LAN access point identifier. Can be set as

desired using up to 32 characters of English letters and numbers.

Bluetooth function

Bluetooth wireless technology

A short-range wireless communications standard for digital devices. Information is exchanged between devices several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves. It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchange of digital information at relatively low speeds, such as computer mouses and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones, text and audio information for PDAs, etc.

Pairing

Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications. For more details,

see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device. ! Pairing is required when you first use the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing

should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Receiver function

Operation Mode

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.

Page 85

Additional information

Features index

Operation Mode

See Operation Mode Setup on page 26 .

AVNavigator

See About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 6 .

Full Auto MCACC

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 24 .

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 58 .

Manual MCACC setup

See Manual MCACC setup on page 60 .

PQLS

See Setting the PQLS function on page 44 .

Phase Control

See Better sound using Phase Control on page 37 .

Standing Wave

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Phase Control Plus

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Auto Sound Retriever

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

ALC (Auto Level Control)

See Auto playback on page 35 .

Front Stage Surround Advance

See Listening in surround sound on page 35 .

Sound Retriever Air

See Listening in surround sound on page 35 .

Dialog Enhancement

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Internet radio

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 39 .

vTuner

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 39 .

DLNA

See About network playback on page 40 .

Wireless LAN

See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 22 .

Playback High Resolution audio file

See About playable file formats on page 41 .

Slideshow

See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 29 .

Bluetooth ADAPTER

See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music on page 33 .

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

See HDMI Setup on page 43 .

SACD Gain

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Auto delay

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height option)

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Virtual Height

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Virtual Surround Back

See Setting the Audio options on page 46 .

Digital Video Converter

See Setting the Video options on page 48 .

Pure Cinema

See Setting the Video options on page 48 .

Progressive Motion

See Setting the Video options on page 48 .

Advanced Video Adjust

See Setting the Video options on page 48 .

Auto Power Down

See The Other Setup menu on page 68 .

Page 86

13 Additional information

Specifications

Amplifier section

Continuous average power output of 90 watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0.08 %** total harmonic distortion.

Front (stereo) ............................ 90 W + 90 W

Power output (1 kHz, 8 W, 0.05 %, 1 ch driven)

................................................. 120 W per channel

Guaranteed speaker impedance ....... 6 W to 16 W

* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers ** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer

Audio Section

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)

LINE .........................................315 mV/47 kW

Output (Level/Impedance)

REC ......................................... 315 mV/2.2 kW

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)

LINE .....................................................100 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]

LINE .......................................................81 dB

Tuner Section

Frequency Range (FM) ......87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

Antenna Input (FM) .................. 75 W unbalanced

Frequency Range (AM) ........530 kHz to 1700 kHz

Antenna (AM) ..............Loop antenna (balanced)

Video Section

Signal level

Composite Video .......................1 Vp-p (75 W)

Component Video

....Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W)

Corresponding maximum resolution

Component Video

................. 1080p (1125p) (Video convert off)

Digital In/Out Section

HDMI terminal ............................19-pin (Not DVI)

HDMI output type ...............................5 V, 100 mA

USB terminal ............USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)

iPod terminal ......... USB, and Video (Composite)

SIRIUS antenna cable......... 8-pin mini DIN cable

ADAPTER PORT terminal ..................5 V, 100 mA

WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal

.............................................................5 V, 600 mA

Integrated Control Section

Control (SR) terminal ..... ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

Control (IR) terminal ......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

IR signal ............... High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)

Network Section

LAN terminal .................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX

Miscellaneous

Power requirements ...................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption ....................................550 W

In standby

.............0.2 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)

0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON) Dimensions

.......... 435 mm (W) x 168 mm (H) x 362.5 mm (D)

(17 3/16 in. (W) x 6 5/8 in. (H) x 14 5/16 in. (D))

Weight (without package) .........10 kg (22 lb 1 oz)

Number of Furnished Parts

MCACC Setup microphone ................................ 1

Remote control unit ............................................ 1

AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries ....................2

iPod cable ............................................................ 1

AM loop antenna ................................................. 1

FM wire antenna ................................................. 1

CD-ROM (AVNavigator) These operating instructions

Note

! Specifications and the design are subject to

possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.

! This product includes FontAvenue® fonts

licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

Preset code list

You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.

Important

! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not

be possible even if a preset code is entered.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach

the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 53 ).

Pioneer 0004, 0006, 0113, 0115, 0116, 0117, 0119, 0122, 0123

Admiral 0001, 0014 Adventura 0012 Aiwa 0002 Akai 0002, 0100 Albatron 0097 Alleron 0009 America Action 0104 Amtron 0008 Anam 0104 Anam National 0003,

0008 AOC 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100

Apex 0021, 0102, 0106 Audiovox 0008, 0104 Aventura 0103 Axion 0094 Bang & Olufsen 0111 Belcor 0004 Bell & Howell 0001 Benq 0064 Bradford 0008, 0104 Brillian 0109 Brockwood 0004 Broksonic 0104 Candle 0004, 0006, 0012,

0100

Carnivale 0100 Carver 0101 CCE 0110 Celebrity 0002 Celera 0106 Changhong 0106 Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008,

0100

Clarion 0104 Coby 0056 Colortyme 0004, 0006 Concerto 0004, 0006 Contec 0104 Contec/Cony 0007, 0008 Craig 0008, 0104 Crosley 0081, 0101 Crown 0008, 0104 CTX 0063 Curtis Mathes 0000,

0004, 0006, 0014, 0100, 0101

CXC 0008, 0104 Cytron 0093 Daewoo 0004, 0005,

0006, 0023

Daytron 0004, 0006 Dell 0073 DiamondVision 0096 Dimensia 0000 Disney 0046

Dumont 0004, 0011,

0099 Durabrand 0041, 0103, 0104

Dwin 0014 Electroband 0002 Electrograph 0107 Electrohome 0002, 0003,

0004, 0006

Element 0082 Emerson 0004, 0006,

0007, 0008, 0009, 0023, 0103, 0104

Emprex 0092 Envision 0004, 0006,

0100

Epson 0061 ESA 0103 Fujitsu 0009 Funai 0008, 0009, 0103,

0104

Futuretech 0008, 0104 Gateway 0067, 0107,

0108 GE 0000, 0003, 0004, 0006, 0010, 0016, 0039

GFM 0080, 0084 Gibralter 0004, 0011,

0099, 0100

Goldstar 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0100

Gradiente 0066 Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104 Haier 0112 Hallmark 0004, 0006 Harman/Kardon 0101 Harvard 0008, 0104 Havermy 0014 Hewlett Packard 0053 Hisense 0069 Hitachi 0004, 0006, 0007 Hyundai 0098 Ilo 0089, 0091 IMA 0008 Infinity 0101 InFocus 0074 Initial 0091 Insignia 0085, 0086 Inteq 0099 Janeil 0012 JBL 0101 JC Penney 0000, 0004,

0005, 0006, 0010

JCB 0002 Jensen 0004, 0006 JVC 0007, 0010, 0044,

5064 Kawasho 0002, 0004, 0006

Page 87

Additional information

KEC 0104 Kenwood 0004, 0006,

0100

KLH 0106 Kloss Novabeam 0008,

0012 KTV 0008, 0100, 0104, 0110 LG 0005, 0052, 0078, 0097

Logik 0001 Luxman 0004, 0006 LXI 0000, 0006, 0101,

0102 Magnavox 0004, 0006, 0019, 0020, 0037, 0042, 0100, 0101

Majestic 0001 Marantz 0004, 0006,

0062, 0100, 0101

Matsushita 0105 Maxent 0087, 0107 Megapower 0097 Megatron 0006 Memorex 0001, 0005,

0006, 0041 MGA 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100 Midland 0010, 0011, 0099

Mintek 0091 Mitsubishi 0004, 0005,

0006, 0014, 0045

Monivision 0097 Montgomery Ward

0001

Motorola 0003, 0014 MTC 0004, 0005, 0006,

0100 Multitech 0008, 0104, 0110

NAD 0006, 0102 NEC 0003, 0004, 0005,

0006, 0100

Net-TV 0107 Nikko 0006, 0100 Norcent 0060

Olevia 0048, 0054, 0059 Onwa 0008, 0104 Oppo 0095 Optimus 0105 Optoma 0075 Optonica 0014 Orion 0025 Panasonic 0003, 0010,

0017, 0027, 0105, 0114, 0120, 0121, 0124, 0125

Penney 0100, 0102 Philco 0003, 0004, 0005,

0006, 0007, 0100, 0101 Philips 0003, 0004, 0007, 0019, 0020, 0101

Philips Magnavox 0019 Pilot 0004, 0100 Polaroid 0057, 0106 Portland 0004, 0005,

0006

Prima 0065 Princeton 0097 Prism 0010 Proscan 0000 Proton 0004, 0006, 0007 Protron 0055 Proview 0068 Pulsar 0004, 0011, 0099 Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105 Radio Shack 0100, 0104 Radio Shack/Realistic

0000, 0004, 0006, 0007, 0008 RCA 0000, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006, 0013, 0024, 0035

Realistic 0100, 0104 Runco 0011, 0099, 0100 Sampo 0004, 0006, 0100,

0107 Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0022, 0032, 0076, 0077, 0083, 0100, 0110

Sansui 0025 Sanyo 0004, 0050 Sceptre 0072

Scotch 0006 Scott 0004, 0006, 0007,

0008, 0009, 0090, 0104 Sears 0000, 0004, 0006, 0009, 0101, 0102, 0103 Sharp 0004, 0006, 0007, 0014, 0033

Sheng Chia 0014 Shogun 0004 Signature 0001 Sony 0002, 0018, 0029,

0030, 0031, 0034 Soundesign 0004, 0006, 0008, 0009, 0104

Squareview 0103 SSS 0004, 0008, 0104 Starlite 0008, 0104 Superscan 0014 Supre-Macy 0012 Supreme 0002 SVA 0088 Sylvania 0004, 0006,

0049, 0079, 0080, 0100, 0101, 0103 Symphonic 0008, 0041, 0103, 0104

Syntax 0054 Syntax-Brillian 0054 Tandy 0014 Tatung 0003, 0108 Technics 0010, 0105 Techwood 0004, 0006,

0010 Teknika 0001, 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008, 0009, 0101, 0104

TMK 0004, 0006 TNCi 0099 Toshiba 0026, 0028,

0036, 0038, 0040, 0043, 0102

Vector Research 0100 Vidikron 0101 Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006 Viewsonic 0058, 0107 Viking 0012 Viore 0089

Vizio 0004, 0070, 0071,

0108 Wards 0000, 0001, 0004, 0005, 0006, 0009, 0100, 0101

Waycon 0102 Westinghouse 0047,

0051 White Westinghouse 0023 Yamaha 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100 Zenith 0001, 0004, 0011, 0015, 0099

DVD

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR).

Pioneer 2014, 2158 Accurian 2092 Advent 2072 Aiwa 2012 Akai 2066 Alco 2070 Allegro 2087 Amphion MediaWorks

2037

AMW 2037 Apex 2002, 2018, 2079,

2080

Apple 2058 Arrgo 2088 Aspire 2073 Astar 2052 Audiovox 2070 Axion 2040 Bang & Olufsen 2081 Blaupunkt 2080 Blue Parade 2078 Boston 2059 Broksonic 2066 California Audio Labs

2068 CambridgeSoundWorks 2065

CineVision 2087 Coby 2029 Curtis Mathes 2089 CyberHome 2000, 2088 Cytron 2039

Daewoo 2021, 2087 Denon 2026, 2068 Desay 2055 DiamondVision 2042 Disney 2022 Durabrand 2090 Emerson 2067, 2082,

2091

Enterprise 2082 ESA 2053, 2091 Fisher 2083 Funai 2091 GE 2016, 2077, 2080 GFM 2043 Go Video 2087 Gradiente 2068 Greenhill 2080 Haier 2094 Harman/Kardon 2030,

2084

Hitachi 2011 Hiteker 2079 iLive 2062 Ilo 2038 Initial 2038, 2080 Insignia 2036, 2064,

2091

Integra 2078 iSymphony 2060 JBL 2084 JVC 2013 Kawasaki 2070

Kenwood 2028, 2068 KLH 2070, 2080 Koss 2024, 2069, 2075 Landel 2093 Lasonic 2085 Lenoxx 2074, 2090 LG 2019, 2051, 2061,

2082, 2087

Liquid Video 2075 Liteon 2025, 2092 Mag

navox 2067, 2076,

2091

Memorex 2066 Microsoft 2077 Mintek 2038, 2080, 2086 Mitsubishi 2020 Nesa 2080 Next Base 2093 Nexxtech 2056 Onkyo 2076 Oppo 2041, 2057 Oritron 2069, 2075 Panasonic 2005, 2007,

2017, 2032, 2033, 2050, 2068, 2076

Philips 2045, 2076 Proceed 2079 Proscan 2077 Qwestar 2069 RCA 2008, 2016, 2070,

2077, 2078, 2080

Regent 2074

Rio 2087 Rowa 2071 Samsung 2009, 2011,

2015, 2031, 2044, 2068

Sansui 2066 Sanyo 2066, 2083 Sharp 2035 Sherwood 2063 Shinsonic 2086 Sonic Blue 2087 Sony 2003, 2004, 2010,

2012, 2027, 2046, 2047, 2048

Sungale 2054 Superscan 2067 Sylvania 2023, 2067,

2091

Symphonic 2023 Teac 2070 Technics 2068 Theta Digital 2078 Toshiba 2001, 2006,

2049, 2066, 2076

Trutech 2000 Urban Concepts 2076 US Logic 2086 Venturer 2070 Xbox 2077 Yamaha 2005, 2068 Zenith 2019, 2076, 2082,

2087

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).

Pioneer 2159, 2160 Denon 2147, 2148, 2149 Hitachi 2144, 2145, 2146 JVC 2127, 2128, 2130,

2131, 2132, 2133

Kenwood 2044 LG 2123, 2124 Marantz 2139, 2140 Mitsubishi 2137, 2138 Onkyo 2126

Panasonic 2114, 2115,

2116

Philips 2117 Samsung 2119 Sharp 2141, 2142, 2143

Sony 2120, 2121, 2122,

2129

Toshiba 2125, 2099 Yamaha 2134, 2135,

2136

Page 88

13 Additional information

DVR (BDR, HDR)

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD, BD.

Pioneer 2103, 2150, 2151, 2152, 2153, 2154, 2155, 2156, 2157

Panasonic 2100, 2106 Sharp 2104, 2112

Sony 2105, 2108, 2109,

2110, 2113 Toshiba 2111

VCR

Pioneer 1035 ABS 1017 Adventura 1005 Aiwa 1005 Alienware 1017 American High 1004 Asha 1002 Audio Dynamics 1000 Audiovox 1003 Bang & Olufsen 1032 Beaumark 1002 Bell & Howell 1001 Calix 1003 Candle 1002, 1003 Canon 1004 Citizen 1002, 1003 Colortyme 1000 Craig 1002, 1003 Curtis Mathes 1000,

1002, 1004

Cybernex 1002 CyberPower 1017 Daewoo 1005 DBX 1000 Dell 1017 DIRECTV 1016, 1020,

1022, 1023, 1024, 1027, 1030, 1031

Dish Network 1029 Dishpro 1029 Durabrand 1018 Dynatech 1005 Echostar 1029 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003

Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005

Expressvu 1029 Fisher 1001 Fuji 1004 Funai 1005 Garrard 1005 Gateway 1017 GE 1002, 1004 GOI 1029 Goldstar 1000, 1003 Gradiente 1005 Harley Davidson 1005 Harman/Kardon 1000 Headquarter 1001 Hewlett Packard 1017 HNS 1016 Howard Computers

1017

HP 1017 HTS 1029 Hughes Network Systems 1016, 1020,

1022, 1023, 1024

Humax 1016, 1020 Hush 1017 iBUYPOWER 1017 Instant Replay 1004 JC Penney 1000, 1001,

1002, 1003, 1004

JCL 1004 JVC 1000, 1001, 1020,

1029

Kenwood 1000, 1001 Kodak 1003, 1004 LG 1003

Linksys 1017 Lloyd’s 1005 LXI 1003 Magnavox 1004, 1018 Magnin 1003 Marantz 1000, 1001,

1004

Marta 1003 Matsushita 1004 Media Center PC 1017 MEI 1004 Memorex 1001, 1002,

1003, 1004, 1005, 1018, 1019

MGN Technology 1002 Microsoft 1017 Mind 1017 Mitsubishi 1010 Motorola 1004 MTC 1002 Multitech 1002, 1005 NEC 1000, 1001 Nikko 1003 Niveus Media 1017 Noblex 1002 Northgate 1017 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003 Orion 1014, 1019 Panasonic 1004, 1008 Philco 1004 Philips 1004, 1011, 1016,

1020, 1022, 1023, 1024, 1025

Philips Magnavox 1011 Pilot 1003

Proscan 1030 Pulsar 1018 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001 Quasar 1004 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realistic

1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005

Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1007,

1016, 1020, 1022, 1030, 1031 Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005

ReplayTV 1026 Ricavision 1017 Runco 1018 Samsung 1002, 1016,

1022, 1024

Sanky 1018 Sansui 1014, 1019 Sanyo 1001, 1002 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004 Sharp 1012 Shogun 1002 Singer 1004 Sonic Blue 1026 Sony 1006, 1009, 1017,

1021

Stack 1017 STS 1004 Sylvania 1004, 1005 Symphonic 1005 Systemax 1017

Tagar Systems 1017 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003 Teac 1005 Technics 1004 Teknika 1003, 1004,

1005

Tivo 1016, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1025

TMK 1002 Toshiba 1015, 1017,

1028

Totevision 1002, 1003 Touch 1017

Satellite Set Top Box

Pioneer 0126, 6097, 6098, 6145

ADB 6035, 6001 Akai 6102 Alba 6005, 6013, 6011 Allsat 6102 Alltech 6011 Amstrad 6033, 6030,

6044

Anttron 6013 Asat 6102 Austar 6000, 6045 BELL 6160 Bell ExpressVu 6002,

6003

British Sky Broadcasting 6030 Canal 6105 Chaparral 6034 CNS 6001 Coolsat 6021 Crossdigital 6043 Digenius 6104 Digiwave 6053 DirecTV 6070, 6110,

6111, 6062, 6063, 6113, 6008, 6038, 6054, 6069, 6060, 6059, 6043, 6018, 6114, 6115, 6116, 6093 Dish Network System 6002, 6089, 6003, 6004 Dishpro 6002, 6089, 6004

DX Antenna 6140 E Aichi 6141

Echostar 6002, 6089,

6036, 6005, 6003, 6004, 6146

Expressvu 6002, 6004 Fujitsu 6133, 6134, 6135 Fortec Star 6123, 6023 Fresat 6014 Funai 6070 GE 6111 General Instrument

6032

GOI 6002, 6004 Grundig 6007, 6030 Hirschmann 6033 Hisense 6020 Hitachi 6038, 6049, 6132 Houston 6002 HTS 6002, 6004 Hughes Network Systems 6113, 6038,

6054, 6114, 6115, 6116

Hyundai 6016 iLo 6020 Innova 6059 Jerrold 6032, 6128, 6149,

6150, 6151, 6152, 6153, 6154, 6155, 6156, 6157

JVC 6002, 6003, 6004 Kathrein 6096 Lava 6053 LG 6047, 6018 Marantz 6102 McIntosh 6032 Mitsubishi 6038 Motorola 6032, 6042 NEC 6050, 6131 Netsat 6059

UltimateTV 1031 Unitech 1002 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videosonic 1002 Viewsonic 1017 Voodoo 1017

Next Level 6032 nfusion 6015 Nokia 6025, 6026, 6118,

6119, 6121 Pace 6035, 6005, 6030, 6031

Panarex 6016 Panasonic 6008, 6009,

6030, 6136, 6137, 6138

Pansat 6016, 6022 Philips 6002, 6113, 6038,

6054, 6060, 6059, 6102, 6103, 6030, 6114

Primestar 6032, 6147 Proscan 6110, 6111 Proton 6020 RadioShack 6002, 6111,

6032

Radix 6036 RCA 6002, 6110, 6111,

6113, 6109, 6061, 6114, 6142, 6144, 6148 SA 6124, 6126, 6158, 6159

Saba 6014 Sagem 6041, 6120 Samsung 6070, 6113,

6091, 6043, 6017, 6114, 6093

Sanyo 6046 Sat Cruiser 6015 Schwaiger 6066 SEI 6139 Siemens 6007, 6036 SKY 6042, 6059, 6030,

6031

SM Electronic 6011

Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,

1005

Yamaha 1000, 1001 Zenith 1013, 1018 ZT Group 1017

Smart 6051 Sonicview 6055, 6107 Sony 6062, 6063, 6030,

6143

Star Choice 6032 Star Trak 6032 TechniSat 6033 Thomson 6110, 6111,

6014 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115, 6116 Toshiba 6038, 6054, 6039, 6130

TPS 6041 Triasat 6033 Ultrasat 6021 US Digital 6020 USDTV 6020 ViewSat 6048 Voom 6032 Zehnder 6101 Zenith 6042, 6069, 6037,

6125, 6127, 6129

Page 89

Additional information

Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)

Pioneer 0126, 0128 Bell ExpressVu 6002,

6003 DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6062, 6113, 6060, 6059, 6114, 6115, 6116

Dish Network System 6002, 6089

Dishpro 6002, 6089 Echostar 6002, 6089,

6003

Expressvu 6002

Hughes Network Systems 6113, 6114,

6115, 6116

JVC 6003 Motorola 6032 Philips 6113, 6114 Proscan 6110

Cable Set Top Box

Pioneer 6028, 6029, 6095, 6099

ABC 6122 Accuphase 6122 Amino 6077, 6078 Auna 6082 BCC 6072 Bell & Howell 6122 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cable One 6074, 6029 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083 Comcast 6074, 6029,

1982

Cox 6074, 6029 Digeo 6029, 6058

Director 6073 Emerson 6122 Fosgate 6072 General Instrument

6073, 6072, 6122

Homecast 6024 i3 Micro 6077 Insight 6074, 6073, 6029 Jebsee 6122 Jerrold 6073, 6072, 6122 Knology 6029 Macab 6040 Mediacom 6074, 6029 Memorex 6112 Motorola 6074, 6073,

6072, 6029, 6122, 6094

MTS 6094

Myrio 6077, 6078 Noos 6040 Pace 6074, 6029, 6028,

6106, 6083

Panasonic 6112, 6083 Paragon 6112 Penney 6112 Philips 6012 Pulsar 6112 Quasar 6112 Regal 6072 Rogers 6029 Runco 6112 Samsung 6095 Scientific Atlanta 6029,

6028, 6027, 6112 Sejin 6077

Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)

Pioneer 0127, 6029 Amino 6078 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cable One 6074, 6029 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Cisco 6029, 6083

Comcast 6074, 6029,

6083, 6076

Cox 6074, 6029 Digeo 6081, 6058 Homecast 6024 Insight 6074, 6029 Knology 6029

Mediacom 6074, 6029 Motorola 6074, 6081 Myrio 6078 Pace 6029 Panasonic 6083 Rogers 6029 Scientific Atlanta 6029

Samsung 6114 Sonicview 6055, 6107 Sony 6062 Star Choice 6032 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115,

6116

Shaw 6074 Starcom 6122 Stargate 6122 Suddenlink 6074, 6029 Supercable 6072 Time Warner 6074,

6029, 6058

Tivo 6076 Toshiba 6112 United Cable 6072, 6122 US Electronics 6072 Videoway 6112 Zenith 6112

Shaw 6074 Suddenlink 6074, 6029 Supercable 6072 Time Warner 6074,

6029, 6058 Tivo 6076

CD (SACD)

Pioneer 5065, 5066 AKAI 5043 Asuka 5045 Denon 5019 Fisher 5048 Goldstar 5040 Hitachi 5042

CD-R

Pioneer 5067 Philips 5054 Yamaha 5055

Cassete Deck

Pioneer 5058, 5059, 5070

Digital Tape

Pioneer 5069

Pioneer 5068

Kenwood 5020, 5021,

5031

Luxman 5049 Marantz 5033 Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030,

5050

Panasonic 5036

Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 RCA 5013, 5029 Roadstar 5052 Sharp 5051 Sony 5012, 5023, 5026,

5027, 5028, 5039

TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034, 5035, 5037

Technics 5041 Victor 5014 Yamaha 5024, 5025,

5038, 5046, 5047

Page 90

IMPORTANTE

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

La luz intermitente con el símbolo de punta de flecha dentro un triángulo equilátero. Está convenido para avisar el usuario de la presencia de “voltaje peligrosa” no aislada dentro el producto que podría constituir un peligro de choque eléctrico para las personas.

ADVERTENCIA

Este aparato no es impermeable. Para evitar el riesgo de incendio y de descargas eléctricas, no ponga ningún recipiente lleno de líquido (como pueda ser un vaso o un florero) cerca del aparato ni lo exponga a goteo, salpicaduras, lluvia o humedad.

ADVERTENCIA

Antes de enchufar el aparato a la corriente, lea la sección siguiente con mucha atención.

La tensión de la red eléctrica es distinta según el país o región. Asegúrese de que la tensión de la alimentación de la localidad donde se proponga utilizar este aparato corresponda a la tensión necesaria (es decir, 230 V ó 120 V) indicada en el panel posterior.

ADVERTENCIA

Para evitar el peligro de incendio, no ponga nada con fuego encendido (como pueda ser una vela) encima del aparato.

ATENCIÓN:

PARA PREVENIR EL PELIGRO DE CHOQUE ELÉCTRICO NO REMOVER LA TAPA NI LAS PARTES DENTRO NO UTILIZADAS, LLAMAR UNA PERSONA CUALIFICADA.

D3-4-2-1-3_A1_Es

D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_Es

D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_Es

DO NOT OPEN

El punto exclamativo dentro un triángulo equilátero convenido para avisar el usuário de la presencia de importantes instrucciones sobre el funcionamiento y la manutención en la libreta que acompaña el aparato.

Entorno de funcionamiento

Temperatura y humedad del entorno de funcionamiento +5 °C a +35 °C; menos del 85 % de humedad relativa (rejillas de refrigeración no obstruidas) No instale este aparato en un lugar mal ventilado, ni en lugares expuestos a alta humedad o a la luz directa del sol (o de otra luz artificial potente).

Si la clavija del cable de alimentación de CA de este aparato no se adapta a la toma de corriente de CA que usted desea utilizar, deberá cambiar la clavija por otra que se adapte apropiadamente. El reemplazo y montaje de una clavija del cable de alimentación de CA sólo deberá realizarlos personal de servicio técnico cualificado. Si se enchufa la clavija cortada a una toma de corriente de CA, puede causar fuertes descargas eléctricas. Asegúrese de que se tira de la forma apropiada después de haberla extraído. El aparato deberá desconectarse desenchufando la clavija de la alimentación de la toma de corriente cuando no se proponga utilizarlo durante mucho tiempo (por ejemplo, antes de irse de vacaciones).

D3-4-2-1-1_A1_Es

D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_Es

D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_Es

Precaución

Para evitar el peligro de incendios, deberá utilizarse un cable de conexión de clase 2 para la conexión con el altavoz, y deberá ponerse apartado de peligros para evitar daños en el aislamiento del cable.

Este producto es para tareas domésticas generales. Cualquiera avería debida a otra utilización que tareas domésticas (tales como el uso a largo plazo para motivos de negocios en un restaurante o el uso en un coche o un barco) y que necesita una reparación hará que cobrarla incluso durante el período de garantía.

PRECAUCIÓN: SUPERFICIE CALIENTE. NO TOCAR.

Si hace funcionar este equipo de manera continuada, es posible que la parte superior del disipador térmico se caliente.

D3-7-13-67*_A1_Es

K041_A1_Es

PRECAUCIÓN PARA LA VENTILACIÓN

Cuando instale este aparato, asegúrese de dejar espacio en torno al mismo para la ventilación con el fin de mejorar la disipación de calor (por lo menos 40 cm encima, 10 cm detrás, y 20 cm en cada lado).

ADVERTENCIA

Las ranuras y aberturas de la caja del aparato sirven para su ventilación para poder asegurar un funcionamiento fiable del aparato y para protegerlo contra sobrecalentamiento. Para evitar el peligro de incendio, las aberturas nunca deberán taparse ni cubrirse con nada (como por ejemplo, periódicos, manteles, cortinas) ni ponerse en funcionamiento el aparato sobre una alfombra gruesas o una cama.

D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_Es

PRECAUCIÓN

El interruptor de la alimentación STANDBY/ON de este aparato no corta por completo toda la alimentación de la toma de corriente de CA. Puesto que el cable de alimentación hace las funciones de dispositivo de desconexión de la corriente para el aparato, para desconectar toda la alimentación del aparato deberá desenchufar el cable de la toma de corriente de CA. Por lo tanto, asegúrese de instalar el aparato de modo que el cable de alimentación pueda desenchufarse con facilidad de la toma de corriente de CA en caso de un accidente. Para evitar correr el peligro de incendio, el cable de alimentación también deberá desenchufarse de la toma de corriente de CA cuando no se tenga la intención de utilizarlo durante mucho tiempo seguido (por ejemplo, antes de irse de vacaciones).

D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_Es

Page 91

Gracias por comprar este producto Pioneer. Lea detenidamente este manual de instrucciones para saber cómo operar este modelo adecuadamente. Una vez haya leído las instrucciones, guárdelas en un lugar seguro para futura referencia.

Contenido

01 Antes de comenzar

Comprobación del contenido de la caja .......5

Instalación del receptor ................................. 5

Instalación de las pilas ................................... 5

Alcance del mando a distancia ..................... 5

Cancelación de la visualización de

demostración ..................................................5

Acerca del funcionamiento del receptor

con un terminal móvil (iPod, iPhone, etc.) .... 5

Acerca del uso del AVNavigator

(CD-ROM incluido) ......................................... 5

02 Controles e indicadores

Mando a distancia .......................................... 7

Indicadores...................................................... 8

Panel frontal .................................................... 9

03 Conexión del equipo

Conexión del equipo ..................................... 10

Panel trasero ................................................. 10

Determinación de la aplicación de los

altavoces ........................................................10

Colocación de los altavoces ........................11

Conexión de los altavoces ............................12

Instalación del sistema de altavoces ..........12

Selección del sistema de altavoces ............13

Acerca de la conexión de audio .................. 14

Acerca del convertidor de vídeo ..................14

Acerca de HDMI ........................................... 14

Conexión a su televisor y componentes

de reproducción ............................................16

Conexión a una grabadora HDD/DVD,

grabadora BD y otras fuentes de vídeo ...... 17

Conexión de un receptor satelital/por

cable o de otro tipo ....................................... 18

Conexión de otros componentes de audio

........................................................................ 18

Conexión de antenas de AM/FM .................19

Configuración MULTI-ZONE ........................ 19

Conexión de un sintonizador

SiriusConnect ...............................................20

Conexión a la red mediante la interfaz

LAN ................................................................ 20

Conexión del ADAPTADOR Bluetooth

opcional ......................................................... 20

Conexión de un iPod ....................................21

Conexión de un aparato USB ...................... 21

Conexión al terminal de vídeo del panel

frontal ............................................................. 21

Conexión a una LAN inalámbrica ...............21

Conexión de un receptor IR .........................21

Utilización de otros componentes

Pioneer con el sensor de esta unidad ........ 22

Conexión del receptor .................................. 22

04 Configuración básica

Cambio del idioma de la OSD (OSD

Language) .....................................................23

Ajuste óptimo automático del sonido (Configuración totalmente automática

de MCACC) .................................................... 23

El menú Input Setup ..................................... 25

Configuración del modo de operación ....... 25

05 Reproducción básica

Reproducción de una fuente .......................27

Reproducción de un iPod ............................ 27

Reproducción de un aparato USB ..............28

Recepción de radio ....................................... 30

Escucha de Satellite Radio ..........................30

ADAPTADOR Bluetooth para disfrutar

de música inalámbrica ................................32

06 Uso del sistema

Reproducción automática ........................... 34

Reproducción con sonido envolvente ........ 34

Uso de alimentación directa ....................... 35

Selección de memorias MCACC .................35

Selección de la señal de entrada ................ 35

Mejor sonido con el control de fase ............36

07 Reproducción con entradas HOME

MEDIA GALLERY

Disfrute de Home Media Gallery .................37

Características de Home Media Gallery ..... 37

Introducción .................................................. 37

Reproducción con Home Media Gallery .... 38

Operaciones avanzadas para radio de

Internet .......................................................... 39

Acerca de la reproducción de la red ...........39

Acerca de los formatos de archivo

reproducibles ................................................41

08 Función Control con HDMI

Acerca de la función Control con HDMI .... 42

Para hacer conexiones de Control con

HDMI .............................................................. 42

Configuración de HDMI ............................... 42

Antes de usar la sincronización ..................43

Acerca de las operaciones sincronizadas

Ajuste de la función PQLS .......................... 43

Precauciones para la función Control

con HDMI ......................................................44

... 43

09 Uso de otras funciones

Ajuste de las opciones de audio .................45

Ajuste de las opciones de vídeo ..................47

Selección de terminales de altavoces ........ 49

Uso de los controles MULTI-ZONE..............49

Cómo hacer una grabación de audio o

vídeo ............................................................... 50

Cómo reducir el nivel de una señal

analógica ....................................................... 50

Cómo utilizar el temporizador de

desconexión .................................................. 50

Cómo atenuar la pantalla ............................50

Cómo comprobar los ajustes del sistema

Cómo restablecer el sistema .......................50

... 50

10 Control de otros componentes del

sistema

Acerca del menú Remote Setup ................. 52

Utilización de múltiples receptores ............52

Uso del mando a distancia para

controlar otros componentes ......................52

Selección directa de códigos de

preajuste ........................................................53

Programación de señales de otros

mandos a distancia ......................................53

Borrado de uno de los botones

programados en el mando a distancia ....... 53

Borrado de todos los ajustes memorizados

que están en una función de entrada ...............54

Función directa ............................................. 54

Operación múltiple y apagado del sistema ...54 Restablecimiento de los ajustes del

mando a distancia ........................................ 55

Control de componentes ............................. 56

11 El menú Advanced MCACC

Cómo hacer ajustes del receptor en el

menú Advanced MCACC ............................. 58

MCACC automática (Experto) .....................58

Configuración manual de MCACC ............. 60

Verificación de datos de la MCACC ............63

Gestión de datos ........................................... 64

12 Menús System Setup y Other Setup

Cómo hacer ajustes del receptor en el

menú System Setup ..................................... 65

Configuración manual de los altavoces ..... 65

Menú Network Setup ................................... 67

Verificación de la información de la red ..... 69

El menú Other Setup .................................... 69

13 Información adicional

Solución de problemas 1 ............................. 71

Solución de problemas 2 ............................. 78

Acerca de los mensajes de estado ............. 83

Información importante relacionada

con la conexión HDMI ..................................84

Limpieza del equipo ......................................84

Formatos de sonido envolvente...................84

Acerca del iPod .............................................84

Acerca de SIRIUS .........................................84

Acerca de FLAC ............................................ 85

Sonido Envolvente automático, ALC y Alimentación Directa con formatos de

señal de entrada diferentes ......................... 85

Glosario .......................................................... 86

Índice de características ..............................89

Especificaciones ........................................... 90

Lista de códigos preajustados ..................... 90

Page 92

Organigrama de ajustes del

receptor

Organigrama para conexiones y ajustes del receptor

La unidad es un receptor AV completo equipado con abundancia de funciones y terminales. Se puede usar fácilmente siguiendo el procedimiento de abajo para hacer las conexiones y ajustes.

Elemento de ajuste necesario: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 Ajuste que resulta necesario hacer: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12

Importante

Los ajustes iniciales del receptor se pueden hacer en el ordenador usando Wiring Navi del CD-ROM del AVNavigator incluido con el receptor. En este caso se pueden hacer virtualmente las mismas conexiones y ajustes que en los pasos 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 y 8. Para conocer instrucciones de uso del AVNavigator, consulte Acerca del uso del AVNavigator (CD-ROM incluido) en página 5 .

1 Antes de comenzar

! Comprobación del contenido de la caja en página 5 ! Instalación de las pilas en página 5

2 Determinación de la aplicación de los altavoces (página 10)

! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales (delanteros altos) ! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales (delanteros anchos) ! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales y conexión de altavoces B ! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales y conexión de biamplificación delantera (sonido

envolvente de alta calidad)

! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales y conexión de ZONE 2 (Multizona)

3 Conexión de los altavoces

! Colocación de los altavoces en página 11 ! Conexión de los altavoces en página 12 ! Instalación del sistema de altavoces en página 12 ! Biamplificación de los altavoces en página 13

4 Conexión de los componentes

! Acerca de la conexión de audio en página 14 ! Acerca del convertidor de vídeo en página 14 ! Conexión a su televisor y componentes de reproducción en página 16 ! Conexión de antenas de AM/FM en página 19 ! Conexión del receptor en página 22

5 Encendido

6 Cambio del idioma de la OSD (OSD Language) (página 23)

7 Ajustes de altavoces MCACC

! Ajuste óptimo automático del sonido (Configuración totalmente automática de MCACC) en página

8 El menú Input Setup (página 25)

(Cuando se usan otras conexiones que no son las recomendadas)

9 Reproducción básica (página 27)

10 Ajuste de la calidad del sonido y de la imagen según se quiera

! Uso de varios modos de escucha (página 34) ! Mejor sonido con el control de fase (página 36) ! Medición de todos los tipos de EQ (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (página 58) ! Cambio del nivel del canal durante la escucha (página 67) ! Encendido/apagado del EQ de calibración acústica, el recuperador automático de sonido o la

mejora de diálogos (página 45)

! Ajuste de la función PQLS (página 43) ! Ajuste de las opciones de audio (página 45) ! Ajuste de las opciones de vídeo (página 47)

11 Otras configuraciones y ajustes opcionales

! Función Control con HDMI (página 42) ! El menú Advanced MCACC (página 58) ! Menús System Setup y Other Setup (página 65)

12 Máximo provecho del mando a distancia

! Utilización de múltiples receptores (página 52) ! Uso del mando a distancia para controlar otros componentes (página 52)

Page 93

Antes de comenzar

Comprobación del contenido de la caja

Compruebe que ha recibido todos los accesorios siguientes:

! Micrófono de configuración (cable: 5 m) ! Mando a distancia ! Pilas secas IEC R03 tamaño AAA (para

confirmar el funcionamiento del sistema) x2

! Antena de cuadro de AM ! Antena alámbrica de FM ! Cable iPod ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) ! Este manual de instrucciones

Instalación del receptor

! Cuando instale el equipo, asegúrese de

colocarlo sobre una superficie nivelada y estable.

! No lo instale en los lugares siguientes:

— sobre un televisor en color (la imagen podría

distorsionarse en la pantalla)

— cerca de una pletina de casete (o cerca

de un dispositivo que genere un campo magnético). Esto podría interferir con el sonido.

— a la luz directa del sol — en lugares húmedos o mojados — en lugares extremadamente calurosos o fríos — en lugares que sean objeto de vibraciones u

otros movimientos

— en lugares donde haya mucho polvo — en lugares donde haya vapores o aceites

calientes (p. ej., en una cocina)

! No toque el panel inferior del receptor

mientras la alimentación está conectada o justo después de desconectarla. Éste se calienta cuando la alimentación está conectada (o justo después de apagarla) y tocarlo puede causar quemaduras.

Instalación de las pilas

Las pilas suministradas con la unidad son para verificar las operaciones iniciales; puede que no duren mucho tiempo. Recomendamos usar pilas alcalinas de duración más larga.

ADVERTENCIA

! No utilice ni guarde las pilas a la luz solar

directa ni en otros lugares de mucho calor como, por ejemplo, dentro de un automóvil o cerca de una calefacción. Esto puede ser la causa de que las pilas tengan pérdidas, se sobrecalienten, revienten o se incendien. También se puede reducir la duración o el rendimiento de las pilas.

PRECAUCIÓN

El uso incorrecto de las pilas puede provocar situaciones peligrosas tales como fugas y explosión. Tenga en cuenta las siguientes precauciones: ! Nunca utilice pilas nuevas y usadas al mismo

tiempo.

! Instale las pilas correctamente, haciendo

coincidir los polos positivo y negativo de las mismas con las marcas de polaridad impresas en el compartimiento de las pilas.

! Aunque distintas pilas tengan la misma

forma, pueden tener tensiones diferentes. No mezcle pilas de distinto tipo.

! Cuando tiene que desembarazarte de las

baterías usadas, por favor se adapte a los reglamentos gubernamentales o a las disposiciones en materia ambiental en vigor en su país o área.

(Ejemplos de símbolos para baterías)

Estos símbolos sólo son válidos en la Unión Europea.

K058c_A1_Es

Alcance del mando a distancia

El mando a distancia puede no funcionar correctamente si: ! Hay obstáculos entre el mando a distancia y el

sensor de mando a distancia del receptor.

! El sensor de mando a distancia está expuesto

a la luz directa del sol o a luz fluorescente.

! El receptor está instalado cerca de un

dispositivo que emite rayos infrarrojos.

! Se utiliza simultáneamente otro mando a

distancia por infrarrojos para controlar el receptor.

30°

7 m

Cancelación de la visualización de demostración

En este receptor, el modo de demostración se activa de forma predeterminada. Cuando se conecta la alimentación, la visualización de demostración se establece y se muestran varias ilustraciones en la pantalla del panel frontal. Para cancelar la visualización de demostración,

conecte el cable de alimentación y haga la operación de abajo. ! El modo de demostración se cancela

automáticamente cuando se realiza la operación Full Auto MCACC.

1 Ponga el receptor en modo de espera. 2 Pulse ENTER mientras mantiene

pulsado u STANDBY/ON en el panel frontal.

Aparecerá RESET c NO d en la pantalla.

3 Seleccione ‘FL DEMO’ usando TUNE i/j.

4 Use PRESET k/l para seleccionar FL DEMO c OFF d y luego pulse ENTER en el panel frontal.

Acerca del funcionamiento del receptor con un terminal móvil (iPod, iPhone, etc.)

El receptor se puede controlar desde el terminal móvil instalando una aplicación especial en el terminal móvil. Para conocer detalles, consulte la información del producto en el sitio Web de Pioneer. Esta aplicación especial puede cambiar o cancelarse sin previo aviso.

Acerca del uso del AVNavigator (CD-ROM incluido)

El CD-ROM del AVNavigator incluido contiene Wiring Navi que le permite hacer fácilmente las conexiones y los ajustes del receptor a modo de diálogo. Los ajustes iniciales de alta precisión se pueden completar fácilmente siguiendo las instrucciones de la pantalla para hacer las conexiones y los ajustes. También hay otras características que permiten usar fácilmente varias funciones, incluyendo

Page 94

01 Antes de comenzar

un manual interactivo que funciona junto con el receptor, y actualizar varios tipos de software, y la aplicación MCACC que le permite verificar los resultados de las mediciones MCACC en gráficos 3D.

Instalación del AVNavigator

1 Cargue el CD-ROM del AVNavigator en la unidad CD de su ordenador.

! La pantalla de instalación se visualiza. Vaya

al paso 2.

! Si no aparece la pantalla de instalación, haga

clic en [AVNavigator] en el escritorio.

2 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla para hacer la instalación.

Cuando se selecciona “Finish”, la instalación termina.

3 Retire el CD-ROM del AVNavigator incluido de la unidad CD del ordenador.

Manejo del CD-ROM

Entorno de funcionamiento

! Este CD-ROM se puede usar con Microsoft®

Windows® XP/Vista/7.

! Para las funciones del AVNavigator se usa

a menudo un explorador. El explorador compatible es Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 o posterior. Con otros exploradores, algunas funciones puede que no se limiten o la visualización puede que no aparezcan bien.

Precauciones para el Uso

! Este CD-ROM es para utilizarse con un PC.

No se puede utilizarlo con un reproductor de DVD o reproductor de CD de música. Intentar reproducir este CD-ROM con un reproductor de DVD o reproductor de CD de música puede dañar los altavoces o perjudiciar la audición debido al volumen muy alto.

Licencia

! Asegúrese de aceptar los “Términos de Uso”

que se indican a continuación antes de utilizar este CD-ROM. No utilice si no está de acuerdo con los términos de uso.

Términos de Uso

! Los derechos de autor de los datos que

se proveen en este CD-ROM pertenecen a Pioneer Corporation. La transferencia, duplicación, transmisión, divulgación pública, traducción, venta, préstamo u otros asuntos relacionados no autorizados que estén fuera del contexto del “uso personal” o “citación” como se define en la Ley de los Derechos de Autor pueden estar sujetos a acciones punitivas. Se otorga el permiso para utilizar este CD-ROM bajo licencia de Pioneer Corporation.

Renuncia de Responsabilidad

! Pioneer Corporation no garantiza el

funcionamiento de este CD-ROM con respecto a cualquier PC con los sistemas operativos aplicables. Además, Pioneer Corporation no será responsable de cualesquiera daños ocasionados por el uso de este CD-ROM, ni tampoco será responsable de ninguna indemnización. Los nombres de compañías privadas, productos y otras entidades que se describen aquí son las marcas registradas o marcas comerciales de sus respectivos propietarios.

Uso del AVNavigator

1 Haga clic en [AVNavigator] del escritorio para iniciar el AVNavigator.

AVNavigator y Wiring Navi se inician. La pantalla de selección de idioma aparece. Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para hacer las conexiones y los ajustes automáticos.

Wiring Navi sólo se inicia automáticamente la primera vez que se inicia el AVNavigator.

2 Seleccione y use la función deseada.

El AVNavigator incluye las funciones siguientes:

! Wiring Navi – Le guía por las conexiones y

los ajustes iniciales en forma de diálogo. Los ajustes iniciales de alta precisión se pueden hacer fácilmente.

! Interactive Manual – Visualiza

automáticamente las páginas que explican las funciones que han sido activadas en el receptor. También es posible manejar el receptor desde el manual interactivo.

! Glossary – Visualiza las páginas del glosario. ! MCACC Appli – Visualiza claramente los

resultados de las mediciones Advanced MCACC en el ordenador.

Para la aplicación MCACC hay

instrucciones de manejo especiales. Estas instrucciones se incluyen en los menús del Interactive Manual del AVNavigator. Consúltelas cuando use la aplicación MCACC.

! Software Update – Permite actualizar

varios tipos de software.

! Settings – Se usa para hacer varios ajustes

del AVNavigator.

! Detection – Se usa para detectar el receptor.

Nota

Para usar el AVNavigator de otro modelo, desinstale (elimine) primero el AVNavigator de este receptor y luego instale el AVNavigator del otro modelo.

Eliminación del AVNavigator

Para desinstalar (eliminar) el AVNavigator de su PC puede usar el método siguiente.

% Elimínelo desde el panel de control del PC.

Desde el menú de inicio, haga clic en “Program” d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d “AVNavigator(VSX-1021)” d “Uninstall”.

Page 95

Controles e indicadores

Mando a distancia

Esta sección explica cómo utilizar el mando a distancia para el receptor.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

2,3

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR

SAT

HMG

CDTV

USB

iPod

INPUT

TV CONTROL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

TV CTRL

TUNER

SIRIUS

RECEIVER

ZONE 2

SELECT

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

VOL

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

RETURN

TUNE

MEMORY MENU

PGM

CTRL STATUS

PHASE

AUDIO

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

DIMMER

807 9

CLASS

ENTER

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

LISTENING MODE

RECEIVER

HDMI

ADPT

VIDEO

T.EDIT

INFO

DISP

12 13

PRESET

El mando a distancia presenta un código de colores según el control del componente utilizando el siguiente sistema:

! Blanco – Control de receptor, control de

televisor

! Azul – Otros controles (Consulte la páginas

27, 28, 30, 32 y 56.)

1 u RECEIVER

Para encender y apagar (modo de espera) el receptor.

2 MULTI OPERATION

Use este botón para realizar múltiples operaciones (página 54).

3 RCU SETUP

Úselo para introducir el código preestablecido cuando se hacen ajustes de mando a distancia y para seleccionar el modo del mando a distancia (página 52).

4 Botones de función de entrada

Púlselos para controlar otros componentes (página 52). Utilice INPUT SELECT c/ d para seleccionar la función de entrada (página 27).

5 ZONE 2

Cambian para hacer operaciones en la ZONE 2 (página 49).

6 Botones TV CONTROL

Estos botones se utilizan exclusivamente para controlar el televisor asignado al botón

TV CTRL.

7 Botones de ajuste del receptor

Para acceder a este botón, primero se debe pulsar :

! AUDIO PARAMETER – Utilice este botón

para acceder a las opciones de audio (página

45).

! VIDEO PARAMETER – Utilice este botón

para acceder a las opciones de vídeo (página

47).

! HOME MENU – Utilice este botón para

acceder al menú inicial (páginas 23, 25, 42, 58 y 65).

! RETURN – Púlselo para confirmar las

opciones seleccionadas y salir del menú actual.

8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Utilice los botones de flecha para configurar su sistema de sonido envolvente (consulte la página 58) y las opciones de audio o vídeo (página 45 o 47).

9 Botones de control del receptor

Para acceder a este botón, primero se debe pulsar :

! PHASE CTRL – Pulse este botón para activar/

desactivar el control de fase (página 36).

! STATUS – Pulse este botón para comprobar

los ajustes del receptor seleccionados (página 50).

! PQLS – Pulse este botón para seleccionar el

ajuste PQLS (página 43).

! S.RETRIEVER – Pulse para restablecer el

sonido de calidad CD en las fuentes de audio comprimido (página 45).

! SIGNAL SEL – Utilice este botón para

seleccionar una señal de entrada (página

35).

! MCACC – Pulse este botón para cambiar

entre las memorias MCACC (página 35).

! SLEEP – Utilice este botón para poner

el receptor en el modo de desconexión automática y seleccionar el tiempo que debe transcurrir antes de que el receptor entre en este modo (página 50).

! CH LEVEL – Pulse este botón repetidamente

para seleccionar un canal; a continuación, utilice los botones k/l para ajustar el nivel (página 67).

! A.ATT – Para atenuar (reducir) el nivel de

una señal de entrada analógica para evitar que se produzca distorsión (página 50).

! DIMMER – Para reducir o incrementar la

luminosidad de la pantalla (página 50).

10 Controles LISTENING MODE

! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Cambia entre los

modos de sonido envolvente automático (página 34), control de nivel automático y Stream Direct (página 35).

! STEREO – Pulse para seleccionar el modo de

reproducción estéreo (página 34).

! STANDARD – Pulse este botón para utilizar

una descodificación estándar y para cambiar varios modos (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, etc.) (página 34).

! ADV SURR – Utilice este botón para

cambiar entre los distintos modos de sonido envolvente (página 35).

11 LED de mando a distancia

Se enciende cuando se envía un comando desde el mando a distancia.

12 TV CTRL

Establece el código preestablecido del fabricante de su televisor cuando controla el televisor (página 53).

Para poner el mando a distancia en el modo de control de receptor (se utiliza para seleccionar los comandos blancos). Cambian para hacer operaciones en la zona principal. Utilice también este botón para configurar el sonido envolvente.

14 MASTER VOLUME +/–

Utilice este botón para ajustar el nivel de volumen.

15 MUTE

Para silenciar/restablecer el sonido (el sonido también se restablece si se ajusta el volumen).

Page 96

02 Controles e indicadores

Indicadores

21 3 9754 108 11 12 13

AUTO

HDMI

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT

PROLOGIC x

ADV.SURROUND

STANDARD

SP AB

L C R SL SR XL XR

LFE

Neo:6

SLEEP

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD

DTS HD ES 96/24

MSTR

CD-R

1 Indicadores de señales

Se iluminan para indicar la señal de entrada seleccionada actualmente. AUTO se ilumina cuando el receptor está ajustado para que seleccione la señal de entrada automáticamente (página 35).

2 Indicadores de formato de programa

Se ilumina para indicar los canales en los que se introducen señales digitales.

! L/R – Canal delantero izquierdo/derecho ! C – Canal central ! SL/SR – Canal de sonido envolvente

izquierdo/derecho

! LFE – Canal de efectos de baja frecuencia

(los indicadores (( )) se iluminan cuando se recibe una señal LFE)

! XL/XR – Dos canales que no son los de

arriba

! XC – Un canal que no sea los de arriba,

el canal de sonido envolvente mono o la bandera de codificación de matriz

3 Indicadores de formato digital

Se ilumina cuando se detecta una señal codificada en el formato correspondiente.

! 2 DIGITAL – Se ilumina con la

decodificación Dolby Digital.

! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Se ilumina con la

decodificación Dolby Digital Plus.

DSD PCM MULTI-ZONE S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX

TUNER

SIRIUS

TUNED

ATT

OVER

VIDEO HMG

HDMI

STEREO MONO

[ 2 ]

USB

[ 3 ]

iPod

PQLS

DVD

18 1915 16 17

ALC

DVR

! 2 TrueHD – Se ilumina con la

decodificación Dolby TrueHD.

! DTS – Se ilumina con la decodificación DTS. ! DTS HD – Se ilumina con la decodificación

DTS-HD.

! 96/24 – Se ilumina con la decodificación

DTS 96/24.

! DSD PCM – Se ilumina durante la conversión

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) a PCM con SACDs.

! PCM – Se ilumina durante la reproducción

de señales PCM.

! MSTR – Se enciende durante la

reproducción de las señales de DTS-HD Master Audio.

4 MULTI-ZONE

Se ilumina cuando la función MULTI-ZONE está activa (página 49).

5 SOUND

Se ilumina cuando se selecciona la característica DIALOG E (mejora de diálogos) o TONE (controles de tono) (página 45).

6 S.RTRV

Se ilumina cuando la función del recuperador de sonido está activada (página 45).

7 Indicadores de modo de audición

! AUTO SURROUND – Se enciende cuando se

activa la función Auto Surround (página 34).

[ 4 ]

! ALC – Se ilumina cuando se selecciona el

ALC (control automático de nivel) (página

34).

! STREAM DIRECT – Se ilumina cuando está

seleccionado Modo directo/Modo directo

puro (página 35).

! ADV.SURROUND – Se ilumina cuando se

selecciona uno de los modos de sonido envolvente avanzado (página 35).

! STANDARD – Se ilumina cuando está

activado uno de los modos de sonido envolvente estándar (página 34).

8 (PHASE CONTROL)

Se ilumina cuando está activada la función de control de fase (página 36).

9 Indicadores de señal analógica

Se encienden para indicar una reducción en el nivel de una señal analógica (página 50).

10 Indicadores del sintonizador

! TUNED – Se ilumina durante la recepción de

una emisión de radio.

! STEREO – Se ilumina durante la recepción

de una emisión de FM estéreo en modo estéreo automático.

! MONO – Se ilumina cuando se selecciona el

modo monoaural con MPX.

Se ilumina cuando se silencia el sonido.

12 Nivel de volumen principal

Indica el nivel de volumen general.

“---” corresponde al nivel mínimo y “+12dB” corresponde al nivel máximo.

13 Indicadores de función de entrada

Se iluminan para indicar la función de entrada que usted ha seleccionado.

14 Indicadores de desplazamiento

Se iluminan cuando hay más elementos seleccionables al hacer varios ajustes.

15 Indicadores de altavoces

Se ilumina para indicar el sistema de altavoces actual usando SPEAKERS (página 49).

16 SLEEP

Se ilumina cuando el receptor se encuentra en modo de desconexión automática (página 50).

17 Indicadores de formato de descodificación de matriz

! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – Se ilumina para indicar

la descodificación de 2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx (página 34).

! Neo:6 – Cuando uno de los modos Neo:6

del receptor está activo, este indicador se ilumina para indicar el procesamiento de Neo:6 (página 34).

18 Pantalla de visualización de caracteres

Muestra distinta información del sistema.

19 Indicador de modo de control remoto

Se ilumina para indicar el ajuste de mando a distancia del receptor. (No se visualiza cuando se pone en 1.) (página 70)

Page 97

Controles e indicadores

Panel frontal

1 2 53 34 6 7 8

AUDIO/ VIDEO MULTI-CH ANNEL RECEIVER

ADVANCED

MCACC

FL OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER

PHONES

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

STANDARD

SURROUND

109 11 12 13 161514

1 u STANDBY/ON

Para encender y apagar (modo de espera) el receptor.

2 Dial INPUT SELECTOR

Utilice este dial para seleccionar una función de entrada.

3 Indicadores

! ADVANCED MCACC – Se enciende

cuando EQ se pone en ON en el menú AUDIO PARAMETER (página 45).

! FL OFF – Se ilumina cuando se selecciona

“off” (no se visualiza nada) con el ajuste de intensidad de iluminación de la pantalla (página 50).

! HDMI – Parpadea cuando se conecta un

componente equipado con HDMI; se ilumina cuando el componente está conectado (página 16).

! iPod iPhone iPad – Se ilumina para indicar

que el iPod/iPhone/iPad está conectado (página 21).

ADVANCED SURROUND

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

RETRIEVER AIR

iPhone

DIRECT

CONTROL

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPad

iPod iPhone iPad

SOUND

4 Controles MULTI-ZONE

Si ha realizado conexiones MULTI-ZONE (página 19), use estos controles para controlar la zona secundaria desde la zona principal (página 49).

5 Pantalla de visualización de caracteres

Consulte Indicadores en página 8 .

6 Controles TUNER

! BAND – Para cambiar entre las bandas de

radio AM y FM (página 30).

! TUNER EDIT – Utilice este botón junto con

TUNE i/j, PRESET k/l y ENTER para

memorizar emisoras y asignarles nombres (página 30).

! TUNE i/j – Encuentran frecuencias de

radio (página 30).

! PRESET k/l – Encuentran emisoras

presintonizadas (página 30).

7 Sensor de mando a distancia

Recibe las señales del mando a distancia (página 5).

8 Dial MASTER VOLUME

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

9 SPEAKERS

Use este botón para cambiar terminales de altavoces (página 49).

10 Conector PHONES

VSX

-1021

Utilícelo para conectar un par de auriculares. Cuando se conecta un par de auriculares, los altavoces no emiten sonido.

11 Botones del modo de escucha

! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT

– Cambia entre los modos de sonido

MASTER VOLUME

envolvente automático (página 34), control de nivel automático y Stream Direct (página

35).

! STANDARD SURROUND – Pulse para hacer

la descodificación estándar y cambiar varios modos (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo, etc.) (página 34).

! ADVANCED SURROUND – Utilice este

botón para cambiar entre los distintos modos de sonido envolvente (página 35).

12 Conector MCACC SETUP MIC

Conecte aquí el micrófono suministrado (página 23).

13 Entrada AUDIO/VIDEO

Consulte Conexión al terminal de vídeo del panel frontal en página 21 .

14 Terminales iPod iPhone iPad USB

Se usa para conectar su Apple iPod/iPhone/ iPad como fuente de audio y vídeo (página 21), o para conectar un dispositivo USB para reproducir audio y fotos (página 21).

15 SOUND RETRIEVER AIR

Cuando se pulsa el botón, la entrada cambia a ADAPTER PORT y el modo de escucha se pone automáticamente en SOUND RETRIEVER AIR (página 33).

16 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Cambie la entrada del receptor a iPod y active las operaciones del iPod en el propio iPod (página 28).

Page 98

03 Conexión del equipo

Conexión del equipo

Este receptor le ofrece muchas posibilidades de conexión, lo que no implica necesariamente que ésta tenga que ser difícil. En este capítulo se explican los tipos de componentes que se pueden conectar para crear el sistema de cine en casa.

PRECAUCIÓN

Antes de extablecer o modificar las conexiones, desconecte la alimentación y desenchufe el cable de alimentación de la toma de corriente. La conexión debe ser el último paso.

Panel trasero

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO 1

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO 1

ZONE 2

DVDY PBP

DVR/BDR IN

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

SIRIUS

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

OUT

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

Nota

Las funciones de entrada de abajo se asignan de forma predeterminada a los diferentes terminales de entrada del receptor. Consulte El menú Input Setup en página 25 para cambiar las asignaciones si se utilizan otras conexiones.

Función de entrada

DVD COAX-1

TV/SAT OPT-1

DVR/BDR OPT-2

VIDEO 1

HDMI 1 IN 1

CD COAX-2

Digital HDMI Componentes

LAN

)

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE 6

16 .

IN1IN

DVD

)

SURROUND

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R LR

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

16 .

Terminales de entrada

(DVD)

(BD)

(DVR/BDR)

(VIDEO 1)

IN1IN

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

Class 2 Wiring

)

Single

SELECTABLE SELECTABLE

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI

IN 1

IN 2

Determinación de la aplicación de los altavoces

Esta unidad le permite construir varios sistemas de sonido envolvente según el número de altavoces que usted tenga. ! Asegúrese de conectar altavoces a los canales

frontales derecho e izquierdo (L y R).

! También es posible conectar solamente uno

de los altavoces traseros de sonido envolvente (SB) o no conectar ninguno.

Elija entre los planes [A] a [E] de más abajo.

Importante

! El ajuste Speaker System se debe hacer

si usted usa cualquiera de las conexiones mostradas abajo a excepción de [A] (consulte Ajuste del sistema de altavoces en página 65 ).

! El sonido no sale simultáneamente por los

altavoces altos delanteros, altavoces anchos delanteros, altavoz B y altavoces traseros de sonido envolvente. Los altavoces de salida son diferentes según la señal de entrada o el modo de escucha.

[A] Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales (delanteros altos)

*Ajuste por defecto

! Ajuste Speaker System: Normal(SB/FH)

FHR

FHL

SBR

SBL

Un sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales conecta los altavoces delanteros derecho e izquierdo (L/R), el altavoz central (C), los altavoces altos delanteros derecho e izquierdo (FHL/ FHR), los altavoces de sonido envolvente derecho e izquierdo (SL/SR), los altavoces de sonido envolvente traseros derecho e izquierdo (SBL/ SBR), y el subwoofer (SW). No es posible reproducir sonido simultáneamente por los altavoces altos delanteros o los altavoces anchos delanteros y los altavoces de sonido envolvente traseros. Este sistema de sonido envolvente producen un sonido más real desde arriba.

[B] Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales (delanteros anchos)

! Ajuste Speaker System: Normal(SB/FW)

FWR

FWL

SBL

SBR

Este plan reemplaza los altavoces altos delanteros derecho e izquierdo mostrados en [A] con los altavoces anchos delanteros derecho e izquierdo (FWL/FWR). No es posible reproducir sonido simultáneamente por los altavoces altos delanteros o los altavoces anchos delanteros y los altavoces de sonido envolvente traseros. Este sistema de sonido envolvente produce un sonido real sobre un área más ancha.

Page 99

Conexión del equipo

[C] Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales y conexión de altavoces B

! Ajuste Speaker System: Speaker B

SBL

SBR

Speaker B

Con estas conexiones puede disfrutar simultáneamente del sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales en la zona principal con reproducción estéreo del mismo sonido en los altavoces B. Las mismas conexiones permiten también usar sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales en la zona principal sin usar los altavoces B.

[D] Sistema de sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales y conexión de biamplificación delantera (sonido envolvente de alta calidad)

! Ajuste Speaker System: Front Bi-Amp Conexión de biamplificación de los altavoces frontales para obtener sonido de alta calidad con sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales.

Front Bi-Amp

[E] Sistema de sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales y conexión de ZONE 2 (Multizona)

! Ajuste Speaker System: ZONE 2 Con estas conexiones puede disfrutar simultáneamente del sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales en la zona principal y de la reproducción estéreo en otro componente de ZONE 2. (La selección de los dispositivos de entrada es limitada.)

Zona principal

Zona secundaria

ZONE 2

Conexiones de otros altavoces

! Sus conexiones favoritas de altavoces se

pueden seleccionar aunque tenga menos de 5.1 altavoces (excepto para los altavoces delanteros derecho/izquierdo).

! Cuando no conecte un subwoofer, conecte

altavoces con capacidad de reproducción de baja frecuencia al canal delantero. (El componente de baja frecuencia del subwoofer se reproduce por los altavoces frontales, por lo que éstos podrían dañarse.)

! Después de conectar, asegúrese de

ejecutar el procedimiento de configuración Full Auto MCACC (ajuste del entorno de los altavoces). Consulte Ajuste óptimo automático

del sonido (Configuración totalmente automática de MCACC) en página 23 .

Colocación de los altavoces

Consulte la tabla de abajo para conocer las ubicaciones de los altavoces que planea conectar.

FHL

FWL

30 30

120 120

SBL

! Coloque los altavoces de sonido envolvente

a 120° del centro. Si, (1) usa el altavoz trasero de sonido envolvente y, (2) no usa los altavoces altos delanteros / altavoces anchos delanteros, le recomendamos colocar el altavoz de sonido envolvente justo a su lado.

! Si sólo planea conectar un altavoz trasero de

sonido envolvente, colóquelo directamente detrás de usted.

! Coloque los altavoces altos delanteros

derecho e izquierdo a un metro como mínimo directamente por encima de los altavoces delanteros derecho e izquierdo.

Algunos consejos para mejorar la calidad del sonido

El lugar donde colocamos los altavoces en la habitación afectará considerablemente a la calidad del sonido. A continuación le ofrecemos una pautas que le ayudarán a obtener la mejor calidad de sonido del sistema. ! El subwoofer se puede colocar en el suelo.

Lo ideal es que los otros altavoces estén a la altura del oído cuando se escuchen. No es

FHR

FWR

SBR

aconsejable colocar los altavoces en el suelo (salvo el subwoofer), ni colgarlos muy alto en una pared.

! Para optimizar el efecto estéreo, coloque

los altavoces delanteros a una distancia de entre 2 m y 3 m el uno del otro y a la misma distancia del televisor.

! Si va a colocar altavoces alrededor de su CRT

TV, use altavoces blindados o coloque los altavoces a una distancia suficiente de su CRT TV.

! Si está utilizando un altavoz central, instale los

altavoces delanteros a mayor distancia uno de otro. En caso contrario, instálelos más cerca uno de otro.

! Instale el altavoz central arriba o debajo del

televisor, de modo que el sonido del canal central quede localizado en la pantalla de TV. Asimismo, asegúrese de que el altavoz central no cruce la línea formada por el borde anterior de los altavoces delanteros izquierdo y derecho.

! Lo más apropiado es colocar los altavoces en

ángulo respecto de la posición de audición. El ángulo depende del tamaño de la habitación. Utilice un ángulo menor para habitaciones grandes.

! Los altavoces de sonido envolvente y los

altavoces traseros de sonido envolvente se deben colocar a una altura de 60 cm a 90 cm por encima de sus oídos y ligeramente inclinados hacia abajo. Asegúrese de que los altavoces no queden frente a frente. En el caso de discos DVD-Audio, los altavoces deben situarse directamente detrás del oyente, más que al reproducir material de cine en casa.

! Intente no colocar los altavoces de sonido

envolvente más alejados de la posición de escucha que los altavoces delanteros y centrales. Si lo hace, puede reducirse el efecto de sonido envolvente.

Page 100

03 Conexión del equipo

Conexión de los altavoces

Cada una de las conexiones de altavoz del receptor incluye un terminal positivo (+) y un terminal negativo (–). Asegúrese de que estos terminales coincidan con los terminales de los propios altavoces.

PRECAUCIÓN

! Estos terminales de altavoces tienen

CORRIENTE PELIGROSA. Para impedir recibir una descarga eléctrica al conectar o desconectar los cables de los altavoces, desconecte el cable de la alimentación antes de tocar cualquier parte sin aislar.

! Asegúrese de trenzar los hilos expuestos del

cable del altavoz e insértelos completamente en el terminal del altavoz. Si alguno de los hilos expuestos del cable del altavoz entra en contacto con el panel trasero, se puede producir un corte de corriente como medida de seguridad.

Conexiones de hilos expuestos

PRECAUCIÓN

Asegúrese de que todos los altavoces están bien instalados. Esto no sólo mejora la calidad de sonido, sino que también reduce el riesgo de daños o lesiones producidos por que se tire o se caiga un altavoz debido un golpe externo, como, por ejemplo, un terremoto.

1 Retuerza juntos los hilos del cable expuesto.

2 Afloje el terminal e inserte el cable expuesto.

3 Apriete el terminal.

1 2 3

10 mm

Nota

! Consulte el manual de los altavoces para

obtener información detallada sobre cómo conectar el otro extremo de los cables de altavoz a los altavoces.

! Utilice un cable RCA para conectar al

subwoofer. No es posible conectar usando cables de altavoces.

Conexiones con clavijas tipo banana

Si quiere usar cables de altavoces con clavijas tipo banana, atornille a fondo el terminal de altavoz y luego enchufe la clavija tipo banana en el extremo del terminal del altavoz.

Instalación del sistema de altavoces

Los únicos altavoces necesarios como mínimo son los altavoces delanteros izquierdo y derecho. Tenga en cuenta que los altavoces de sonido envolvente principales deben conectarse siempre juntos, pero si lo desea puede conectar un único altavoz de sonido envolvente trasero (que debe conectarse al terminal de sonido envolvente trasero izquierdo).

Conexión de sonido envolvente estándar

Los terminales de altavoces altos delanteros también se pueden usar para los altavoces anchos delanteros y los altavoces B.

Delantero derecho

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/

OUT

BDR

(

ASSIGN ABLE

( BDR

MONITOR OUT

Sonido

envolvente

derecho

Ajuste de altavoz alto delantero

Altavoz alto delantero derecho

Ajuste de altavoz ancho delantero

Altavoz ancho delantero derecho

Altavoz B - derecho Altavoz B - izquierdo

VIDEO 1 IN

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

VIDEO 1

TV/SAT

OUT OUT

INININ

OUT

DVD ININ

)

DVD

DVR/

)

TV/SAT

VIDEO 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

Ajuste de altavoces B

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

ZONE 2

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

SIRIUS

SUBWOOFER

DVDY PBP

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

PRE OUT

Los terminales traseros de sonido envolvente también se pueden usar para la ZONE 2.

Ajuste envolvente de 5.1 canales

No conectado No conectado

Ajuste envolvente de 6.1 canales

No conectado Sonido envolvente trasero

Ajuste envolvente de 7.1 canales

Sonido envolvente trasero derecho

ZONE 2 - Derecho ZONE 2 - Izquierdo

Altavoz alto delantero izquierdo

Altavoz ancho delantero izquierdo

Central Subwoofer

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

IN1IN

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R LR

16 .

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUND

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE

SPEAKERS

16 .

Ajuste de ZONE 2

Sonido envolvente trasero izquierdo

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

Class 2 Wiring

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

( Single

SELECTABLE SELECTABLE

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

)

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI

Delantero izquierdo

Sonido

envolvente

izquierdo